Chapter 8: NTSC, PAL, and SECAM Overview - deetc
Chapter 8: NTSC, PAL, and SECAM Overview - deetc
Chapter 8: NTSC, PAL, and SECAM Overview - deetc
You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles
YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.
<strong>Chapter</strong> 8<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong><br />
<strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
To fully underst<strong>and</strong> the <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong><br />
<strong>SECAM</strong> encoding <strong>and</strong> decoding processes, it<br />
is helpful to review the background of these<br />
st<strong>and</strong>ards <strong>and</strong> how they came about.<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
The first color television system was developed<br />
in the United States, <strong>and</strong> on December 17,<br />
1953, the Federal Communications Commission<br />
(FCC) approved the transmission st<strong>and</strong>ard,<br />
with broadcasting approved to begin<br />
January 23, 1954. Most of the work for developing<br />
a color transmission st<strong>and</strong>ard that was<br />
compatible with the (then current) 525-line, 60field-per-second,<br />
2:1 interlaced monochrome<br />
st<strong>and</strong>ard was done by the National Television<br />
System Committee (<strong>NTSC</strong>).<br />
Luminance Information<br />
The monochrome luminance (Y) signal is<br />
derived from gamma-corrected red, green, <strong>and</strong><br />
blue (R´G´B´) signals:<br />
Y = 0.299R´ + 0.587G´ + 0.114B´<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 247<br />
Due to the sound subcarrier at 4.5 MHz, a<br />
requirement was made that the color signal fit<br />
within the same b<strong>and</strong>width as the monochrome<br />
video signal (0–4.2 MHz).<br />
For economic reasons, another requirement<br />
was made that monochrome receivers<br />
must be able to display the black <strong>and</strong> white<br />
portion of a color broadcast <strong>and</strong> that color<br />
receivers must be able to display a monochrome<br />
broadcast.<br />
Color Information<br />
The eye is most sensitive to spatial <strong>and</strong> temporal<br />
variations in luminance; therefore, luminance<br />
information was still allowed the entire<br />
b<strong>and</strong>width available (0–4.2 MHz). Color information,<br />
to which the eye is less sensitive <strong>and</strong><br />
therefore requires less b<strong>and</strong>width, is represented<br />
as hue <strong>and</strong> saturation information.<br />
The hue <strong>and</strong> saturation information is<br />
transmitted using a 3.58-MHz subcarrier,<br />
encoded so that the receiver can separate the<br />
hue, saturation, <strong>and</strong> luminance information<br />
<strong>and</strong> convert them back to RGB signals for display.<br />
Although this allows the transmission of<br />
color signals within the same b<strong>and</strong>width as<br />
247
248 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
monochrome signals, the problem still<br />
remains as to how to cost-effectively separate<br />
the color <strong>and</strong> luminance information, since<br />
they occupy the same portion of the frequency<br />
spectrum.<br />
To transmit color information, U <strong>and</strong> V or I<br />
<strong>and</strong> Q “color difference” signals are used:<br />
R´ –Y = 0.701R´ –0.587G´–0.114B´<br />
B´–Y=–0.299R´–0.587G´ + 0.886B´<br />
U = 0.492(B´ –Y)<br />
V = 0.877(R´ –Y)<br />
I = 0.596R´–0.275G´ –0.321B´<br />
=Vcos33° – Usin 33°<br />
= 0.736(R´–Y) – 0.268(B´ –Y)<br />
Q = 0.212R´–0.523G´ + 0.311B´<br />
=Vsin33° +Ucos33°<br />
= 0.478(R´–Y) + 0.413(B´ –Y)<br />
The scaling factors to generate U <strong>and</strong> V<br />
from (B´ –Y) <strong>and</strong> (R´ –Y) were derived due to<br />
overmodulation considerations during transmission.<br />
If the full range of (B´ –Y) <strong>and</strong> (R´ –<br />
Y) were used, the modulated chrominance levels<br />
would exceed what the monochrome transmitters<br />
were capable of supporting.<br />
Experimentation determined that modulated<br />
subcarrier amplitudes of 20% of the Y signal<br />
amplitude could be permitted above white <strong>and</strong><br />
below black. The scaling factors were then<br />
selected so that the maximum level of 75%<br />
color would be at the white level.<br />
I <strong>and</strong> Q were initially selected since they<br />
more closely related to the variation of color<br />
acuity than U <strong>and</strong> V. The color response of the<br />
eye decreases as the size of viewed objects<br />
decreases. Small objects, occupying frequencies<br />
of 1.3–2.0 MHz, provide little color sensation.<br />
Medium objects, occupying the 0.6–1.3<br />
MHz frequency range, are acceptable if reproduced<br />
along the orange-cyan axis. Larger<br />
objects, occupying the 0–0.6 MHz frequency<br />
range, require full three-color reproduction.<br />
The I <strong>and</strong> Q b<strong>and</strong>widths were chosen<br />
accordingly, <strong>and</strong> the preferred color reproduction<br />
axis was obtained by rotating the U <strong>and</strong> V<br />
axes by 33°. The Q component, representing<br />
the green-purple color axis, was b<strong>and</strong>-limited<br />
to about 0.6 MHz. The I component, representingtheorange-cyancoloraxis,wasb<strong>and</strong>-limited<br />
to about 1.3 MHz.<br />
Another advantage of limiting the I <strong>and</strong> Q<br />
b<strong>and</strong>widths to 1.3 MHz <strong>and</strong> 0.6 MHz, respectively,<br />
is to minimize crosstalk due to asymmetrical<br />
sideb<strong>and</strong>s as a result of lowpass filtering<br />
the composite video signal to about 4.2 MHz.<br />
Q is a double sideb<strong>and</strong> signal; however, I is<br />
asymmetrical, bringing up the possibility of<br />
crosstalk between I <strong>and</strong> Q. The symmetry of Q<br />
avoids crosstalk into I; since Q is b<strong>and</strong>width<br />
limited to 0.6 MHz, I crosstalk falls outside the<br />
Qb<strong>and</strong>width.<br />
Advances in electronics have prompted<br />
changes. U <strong>and</strong> V, both b<strong>and</strong>width-limited to<br />
1.3 MHz, are now commonly used instead of I<br />
<strong>and</strong> Q. A greater amount of processing is<br />
required in the decoder due to both U <strong>and</strong> V<br />
being asymmetrical about the color subcarrier.<br />
The UV <strong>and</strong> IQ vector diagram is shown in<br />
Figure 8.1.<br />
Color Modulation<br />
I <strong>and</strong> Q (or U <strong>and</strong> V) are used to modulate a<br />
3.58-MHz color subcarrier using two balanced<br />
modulators operating in phase quadrature: one<br />
modulator is driven by the subcarrier at sine<br />
phase, the other modulator is driven by the<br />
subcarrier at cosine phase. The outputs of the<br />
modulators are added together to form the<br />
modulated chrominance signal:
C=Qsin(ωt +33°) +Icos(ωt +33°)<br />
ω =2πF SC<br />
F SC = 3.579545 MHz (± 10 Hz)<br />
or, if U <strong>and</strong> V are used instead of I <strong>and</strong> Q:<br />
C=Usinωt+Vcosωt<br />
Hue information is conveyed by the<br />
chrominance phase relative to the subcarrier.<br />
Saturation information is conveyed by chrominance<br />
amplitude. In addition, if an object has<br />
no color (such as a white, gray, or black<br />
object), the subcarrier is suppressed.<br />
YELLOW<br />
167˚<br />
BURST<br />
180˚<br />
62<br />
GREEN<br />
241˚<br />
RED<br />
103˚<br />
88<br />
+ V<br />
90˚<br />
100<br />
80<br />
60<br />
40<br />
20<br />
82 88<br />
Composite Video Generation<br />
CYAN<br />
283˚<br />
IRE SCALE UNITS<br />
82<br />
MAGENTA<br />
61˚<br />
62<br />
– I<br />
303˚<br />
+ Q<br />
33˚<br />
BLUE<br />
347˚<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 249<br />
The modulated chrominance is added to the<br />
luminance information along with appropriate<br />
horizontal <strong>and</strong> vertical sync signals, blanking<br />
information, <strong>and</strong> color burst information, to<br />
generate the composite color video waveform<br />
shown in Figure 8.2.<br />
composite <strong>NTSC</strong> = Y + Q sin (ωt +33°)<br />
+Icos(ωt+33°) +timing<br />
or, if U <strong>and</strong> V are used instead of I <strong>and</strong> Q:<br />
composite <strong>NTSC</strong> = Y + U sin ωt<br />
+Vcosωt +timing<br />
Figure 8.1. UV <strong>and</strong> IQ Vector Diagram for 75% Color Bars.<br />
+ U<br />
0˚
250 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
100 IRE<br />
40 IRE<br />
20 IRE<br />
20 IRE<br />
7.5 IRE<br />
3.58 MHZ<br />
COLOR BURST<br />
(9 ± 1 CYCLES)<br />
WHITE<br />
BLANK LEVEL<br />
YELLOW<br />
LUMINANCE LEVEL<br />
CYAN<br />
GREEN<br />
MAGENTA<br />
RED<br />
BLUE<br />
PHASE = HUE<br />
BLACK<br />
WHITE LEVEL<br />
BLACK LEVEL<br />
BLANK LEVEL<br />
SYNC LEVEL<br />
Figure 8.2. (M) <strong>NTSC</strong> Composite Video Signal for 75% Color Bars.<br />
COLOR<br />
SATURATION
The b<strong>and</strong>width of the resulting composite<br />
video signal is shown in Figure 8.3.<br />
The I <strong>and</strong> Q (or U <strong>and</strong> V) information can<br />
be transmitted without loss of identity as long<br />
as the proper color subcarrier phase relationship<br />
is maintained at the encoding <strong>and</strong> decoding<br />
process. A color burst signal, consisting of<br />
nine cycles of the subcarrier frequency at a<br />
specific phase, follows most horizontal sync<br />
pulses, <strong>and</strong> provides the decoder a reference<br />
signalsoastobeabletoproperlyrecovertheI<br />
<strong>and</strong>Q(orU<strong>and</strong>V)signals.Thecolorburst<br />
phase is defined to be along the –U axisas<br />
shown in Figure 8.1.<br />
Color Subcarrier Frequency<br />
The specific choice for the color subcarrier frequency<br />
was dictated by several factors. The<br />
first was the need to provide horizontal interlace<br />
to reduce the visibility of the subcarrier,<br />
requiring that the subcarrier frequency, F SC ,<br />
be an odd multiple of one-half the horizontal<br />
line rate. The second factor was selection of a<br />
frequency high enough that it generated a fine<br />
interference pattern having low visibility.<br />
Third, double sideb<strong>and</strong>s for I <strong>and</strong> Q (or U <strong>and</strong><br />
V) b<strong>and</strong>widths below 0.6 MHz had to be<br />
allowed.<br />
Thechoiceofthefrequenciesis:<br />
FH =(4.5x10 6 /286) Hz = 15,734.27 Hz<br />
FV =FH /(525/2) = 59.94 Hz<br />
FSC =((13x7x5)/2)xFH = (455/2) x FH = 3.579545 MHz<br />
The resulting F V (field) <strong>and</strong> F H (line) rates<br />
were slightly different from the monochrome<br />
st<strong>and</strong>ards, but fell well within the tolerance<br />
ranges <strong>and</strong> were therefore acceptable. Figure<br />
8.4 illustrates the resulting spectral interleaving.<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 251<br />
The luminance (Y) components are modulated<br />
due to the horizontal blanking process,<br />
resulting in bunches of luminance information<br />
spaced at intervals of F H . These signals are further<br />
modulated by the vertical blanking process,<br />
resulting in luminance frequency<br />
components occurring at NF H ± MF V .Nhasa<br />
maximum value of about 277 with a 4.2-MHz<br />
b<strong>and</strong>width-limited luminance. Thus, luminance<br />
information is limited to areas about integral<br />
harmonics of the line frequency (F H ), with<br />
additional spectral lines offset from NF H by the<br />
29.97-Hz vertical frame rate.<br />
The area in the spectrum between luminance<br />
groups, occurring at odd multiples of<br />
one-half the line frequency, contains minimal<br />
spectral energy <strong>and</strong> is therefore used for the<br />
transmission of chrominance information. The<br />
harmonics of the color subcarrier are separated<br />
from each other by F H sincetheyareodd<br />
multiples of one-half F H , providing a half-line<br />
offset <strong>and</strong> resulting in an interlace pattern that<br />
moves upward. Four complete fields are<br />
required to repeat a specific sample position,<br />
as shown in Figure 8.5.<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong> Variations<br />
There are three common variations of <strong>NTSC</strong>,<br />
as shown in Figures 8.6 <strong>and</strong> 8.7.<br />
The first, called “<strong>NTSC</strong> 4.43”, iscommonly<br />
used for multist<strong>and</strong>ard analog VCRs. The horizontal<br />
<strong>and</strong> vertical timing is the same as (M)<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong>; color encoding uses the <strong>PAL</strong> modulation<br />
format <strong>and</strong> a 4.43361875 MHz color subcarrier<br />
frequency.<br />
The second, “<strong>NTSC</strong>–J”, isusedinJapan.It<br />
isthesameas(M)<strong>NTSC</strong>,exceptthereisno<br />
blanking pedestal during active video. Thus,<br />
active video has a nominal amplitude of 714<br />
mV.
252 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
AMPLITUDE<br />
Y I I Q<br />
I<br />
Q<br />
0.0 1.0<br />
2.0 3.0 3.58 4.2<br />
AMPLITUDE<br />
0.0<br />
Y U<br />
V<br />
CHROMINANCE<br />
SUBCARRIER<br />
(A)<br />
CHROMINANCE<br />
SUBCARRIER<br />
U<br />
V<br />
1.0 2.0 3.0 3.58 4.2<br />
(B)<br />
FREQUENCY (MHZ)<br />
FREQUENCY (MHZ)<br />
Figure 8.3. Video B<strong>and</strong>widths of Baseb<strong>and</strong> (M) <strong>NTSC</strong> Video. (a)<br />
Using 1.3-MHz I <strong>and</strong> 0.6-MHz Q signals. (b) Using 1.3-MHz U <strong>and</strong><br />
V signals.
Y<br />
I, Q<br />
FH / 2 FH / 2<br />
FH<br />
Y<br />
I, Q<br />
Y I, Q Y I, Q Y<br />
227FH 228FH 229FH<br />
227.5FH 228.5FH<br />
15.734<br />
KHZ<br />
Y<br />
F<br />
29.97 HZ<br />
SPACING<br />
Figure 8.4. Luma <strong>and</strong> Chroma Frequency Interleave Principle.<br />
Note that 227.5F H =F SC.<br />
F<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 253
254 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
ANALOG<br />
FIELD 1<br />
523 524 525 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 22<br />
EQUALIZING<br />
PULSES<br />
ANALOG<br />
FIELD 2<br />
261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 285 286<br />
ANALOG<br />
FIELD 3<br />
523 524 525 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 22<br />
ANALOG<br />
FIELD 4<br />
BURST BEGINS WITH POSITIVE HALF-CYCLE<br />
BURST PHASE = 180˚ RELATIVE TO U<br />
BURST BEGINS WITH NEGATIVE HALF-CYCLE<br />
BURST PHASE = 180˚ RELATIVE TO U<br />
START<br />
OF<br />
VSYNC<br />
SERRATION<br />
PULSES<br />
BURST PHASE<br />
BURST PHASE<br />
EQUALIZING<br />
PULSES<br />
261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 285 286<br />
H / 2 H / 2<br />
HSYNC HSYNC / 2<br />
H / 2 H / 2<br />
Figure 8.5. Four-field (M) <strong>NTSC</strong> Sequence <strong>and</strong> Burst Blanking.
"M"<br />
LINE / FIELD = 525 / 59.94<br />
FH = 15.734 KHZ<br />
FV = 59.94 HZ<br />
FSC = 3.579545 MHZ<br />
BLANKING SETUP = 7.5 IRE<br />
VIDEO BANDWIDTH = 4.2 MHZ<br />
AUDIO CARRIER = 4.5 MHZ<br />
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH = 6 MHZ<br />
QUADRATURE MODULATED SUBCARRIER<br />
PHASE = HUE<br />
AMPLITUDE = SATURATION<br />
LINE / FIELD = 525 / 59.94<br />
FH = 15.734 KHZ<br />
FV = 59.94 HZ<br />
FSC = 3.579545 MHZ<br />
The third, called “noninterlaced <strong>NTSC</strong>,” is<br />
a 262-line, 60 frames-per-second version of<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong>, as shown in Figure 8.7. This format is<br />
identical to st<strong>and</strong>ard (M) <strong>NTSC</strong>, except that<br />
there are 262 lines per frame.<br />
RF Modulation<br />
Figures 8.8, 8.9, <strong>and</strong> 8.10 illustrate the basic<br />
process of converting baseb<strong>and</strong> (M) <strong>NTSC</strong><br />
composite video to a RF (radio frequency) signal.<br />
Figure 8.8a shows the frequency spectrum<br />
of a baseb<strong>and</strong> composite video signal. It is similar<br />
to Figure 8.3, however, Figure 8.3 only<br />
shows the upper sideb<strong>and</strong> for simplicity. The<br />
“video carrier” notation at 0 MHz serves only<br />
as a reference point for comparison with Figure<br />
8.8b.<br />
Figure 8.8b shows the audio/video signal<br />
as it resides within a 6-MHz channel (such as<br />
channel 3). The video signal has been lowpass<br />
"<strong>NTSC</strong>–J"<br />
BLANKING SETUP = 0 IRE<br />
VIDEO BANDWIDTH = 4.2 MHZ<br />
AUDIO CARRIER = 4.5 MHZ<br />
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH = 6 MHZ<br />
Figure 8.6. Common <strong>NTSC</strong> Systems.<br />
"<strong>NTSC</strong> 4.43"<br />
LINE / FIELD = 525 / 59.94<br />
FH = 15.734 KHZ<br />
FV = 59.94 HZ<br />
FSC = 4.43361875 MHZ<br />
BLANKING SETUP = 7.5 IRE<br />
VIDEO BANDWIDTH = 4.2 MHZ<br />
AUDIO CARRIER = 4.5 MHZ<br />
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH = 6 MHZ<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 255<br />
filtered, most of the lower sideb<strong>and</strong> has been<br />
removed, <strong>and</strong> audio information has been<br />
added.<br />
Figure 8.8c details the information present<br />
on the audio subcarrier for stereo (BTSC)<br />
operation.<br />
As shown in Figures 8.9 <strong>and</strong> 8.10, back<br />
porch clamping of the analog video signal<br />
ensures that the back porch level is constant,<br />
regardless of changes in the average picture<br />
level. White clipping of the video signal prevents<br />
the modulated signal from going below<br />
10%; below 10% may result in overmodulation<br />
<strong>and</strong> “buzzing” in television receivers. The<br />
video signal is then lowpass filtered to 4.2 MHz<br />
<strong>and</strong> drives the AM (amplitude modulation)<br />
video modulator. The sync level corresponds<br />
to 100% modulation, the blanking corresponds<br />
to 75%, <strong>and</strong> the white level corresponds to 10%.<br />
(M) <strong>NTSC</strong> systems use an IF (intermediate<br />
frequency) for the video of 45.75 MHz.
256 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
START<br />
OF<br />
VSYNC<br />
261 262 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 22<br />
At this point, audio information is added on<br />
a subcarrier at 41.25 MHz. A monaural audio<br />
signal is processed as shown in Figure 8.9 <strong>and</strong><br />
drives the FM (frequency modulation) modulator.<br />
The output of the FM modulator is added<br />
to the IF video signal.<br />
The SAW filter, used as a vestigial sideb<strong>and</strong><br />
filter, provides filtering of the IF signal.<br />
The mixer, or up converter, mixes the IF signal<br />
with the desired broadcast frequency. Both<br />
sum <strong>and</strong> difference frequencies are generated<br />
by the mixing process, so the difference signal<br />
is extracted by using a b<strong>and</strong>pass filter.<br />
Stereo Audio (Analog)<br />
BTSC<br />
The implementation of stereo audio, known as<br />
the BTSC system (Broadcast Television Systems<br />
Committee), is shown in Figure 8.10.<br />
Countries that use this system include the<br />
United States, Canada, Mexico, Brazil, <strong>and</strong> Taiwan.<br />
BURST BEGINS WITH POSITIVE HALF-CYCLE<br />
BURST PHASE = REFERENCE PHASE = 180˚ RELATIVE TO U<br />
BURST BEGINS WITH NEGATIVE HALF-CYCLE<br />
BURST PHASE = REFERENCE PHASE = 180˚ RELATIVE TO U<br />
Figure 8.7. Noninterlaced <strong>NTSC</strong> Frame Sequence.<br />
To enable stereo, L–R information is transmitted<br />
using a suppressed AM subcarrier. A<br />
SAP (secondary audio program) channel may<br />
also be present, commonly used to transmit a<br />
second language or commentary. A professional<br />
channel may be present, allowing communication<br />
with remote equipment <strong>and</strong><br />
people.<br />
Zweiton M<br />
This implementation for analog stereo audio<br />
(ITU-R BS.707) is similar to that used for <strong>PAL</strong>.<br />
The L+R information is transmitted on a FM<br />
subcarrier at 4.5 MHz. The R information is<br />
transmitted on a second FM subcarrier at (4.5<br />
MHz + 15.5F H )or4.72MHz.Thissystemis<br />
used in South Korea.<br />
EIA-J<br />
This implementation for analog stereo audio is<br />
similartoBTSC,<strong>and</strong>isusedinJapan.TheL–R<br />
signal, or a second L+R signal, is transmitted<br />
on a second FM subcarrier.
–4.5<br />
CHROMINANCE<br />
SUBCARRIER<br />
–4.2<br />
–3.58<br />
VIDEO<br />
CARRIER<br />
CHROMINANCE<br />
SUBCARRIER<br />
–3.0 –1.0 0.0 1.0<br />
3.0 3.58 4.2 4.5<br />
VIDEO<br />
CARRIER<br />
–4.0 –3.0 –0.75 0.0 1.0<br />
3.0 3.58 4.2 4.5 5.0<br />
AUDIO<br />
CARRIER<br />
0.0<br />
L + R<br />
(FM)<br />
0.75 MHZ<br />
VESTIGIAL<br />
SIDEBAND<br />
STEREO<br />
PILOT<br />
–1.25<br />
L – R<br />
(AM)<br />
FH = 15,734 HZ<br />
(A)<br />
6 MHZ CHANNEL<br />
(B)<br />
(C)<br />
CHROMINANCE<br />
SUBCARRIER<br />
SAP<br />
(FM)<br />
AUDIO<br />
CARRIER<br />
FH 2 FH 3 FH 4 FH 5 FH 6.5 FH<br />
4.75<br />
PROFESSIONAL<br />
CHANNEL (FM)<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 257<br />
FREQUENCY (MHZ)<br />
FREQUENCY (MHZ)<br />
FREQUENCY<br />
Figure 8.8. Transmission Channel for (M) <strong>NTSC</strong>. (a) Frequency spectrum of baseb<strong>and</strong> composite<br />
video. (b) Frequency spectrum of typical channel including audio information. (c) Detailed<br />
frequency spectrum of BTSC stereo audio information.
258 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Analog Channel Assignments<br />
Tables 8.1 through 8.4 list the typical channel<br />
assignments for VHF, UHF, <strong>and</strong> cable for various<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong> systems.<br />
Note that cable systems routinely reassign<br />
channel numbers to alternate frequencies to<br />
minimize interference <strong>and</strong> provide multiple<br />
levels of programming (such as two versions of<br />
a premium movie channel: one for subscribers,<br />
<strong>and</strong> one for nonsubscribers during pre-view<br />
times).<br />
AUDIO LEFT<br />
AUDIO RIGHT<br />
(M) <strong>NTSC</strong><br />
COMPOSITE<br />
VIDEO<br />
5 KHZ<br />
CLOCK<br />
BACK<br />
PORCH<br />
CLAMP<br />
AND<br />
WHITE<br />
LEVEL<br />
CLIP<br />
L + R<br />
---------------<br />
75 µS<br />
PRE-EMPHASIS<br />
---------------<br />
50–15000 HZ BPF<br />
PLL<br />
PLL<br />
PLL<br />
4.2 MHZ<br />
LPF<br />
45.75 MHZ<br />
IF VIDEO CARRIER<br />
41.25 MHZ<br />
IF AUDIO CARRIER<br />
AM<br />
MODULATOR<br />
VIDEO CARRIER<br />
OF DESIRED CHANNEL<br />
FM<br />
MODULATOR<br />
+<br />
Use by Country<br />
Figure 8.6 shows the common designations for<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong> systems. The letter “M” refers to the<br />
monochrome st<strong>and</strong>ard for line <strong>and</strong> field rates<br />
(525/59.94), a video b<strong>and</strong>width of 4.2 MHz, an<br />
audio carrier frequency 4.5 MHz above the<br />
video carrier frequency, <strong>and</strong> a RF channel<br />
b<strong>and</strong>width of 6 MHz. The “<strong>NTSC</strong>” refers to the<br />
technique to add color information to the<br />
monochrome signal. Detailed timing parameters<br />
can be found in Table 8.9.<br />
SAW<br />
FILTER<br />
41–47 MHZ<br />
BANDWIDTH<br />
MIXER<br />
(UP CONVERTER)<br />
BANDPASS<br />
FILTER<br />
Figure 8.9. Typical RF Modulation Implementation for (M) <strong>NTSC</strong>: Mono Audio.<br />
MODULATED RF<br />
AUDIO / VIDEO<br />
(6 MHZ BANDWIDTH)
AUDIO LEFT<br />
AUDIO RIGHT<br />
(M) <strong>NTSC</strong><br />
COMPOSITE<br />
VIDEO<br />
PROFESSIONAL<br />
CHANNEL<br />
AUDIO<br />
SECONDARY<br />
AUDIO<br />
BACK<br />
PORCH<br />
CLAMP<br />
AND<br />
WHITE<br />
LEVEL<br />
CLIP<br />
150 µS<br />
PRE-EMPHASIS<br />
---------------<br />
300–3,400 HZ BPF<br />
PROFESSIONAL CHANNEL<br />
50–10,000 HZ BPF<br />
---------------<br />
BTSC<br />
COMPRESSION<br />
SECONDARY AUDIO PROGRAM (SAP)<br />
FM STEREO<br />
PILOT SIGNAL<br />
L – R<br />
---------------<br />
50–15,000 HZ BPF<br />
---------------<br />
BTSC<br />
COMPRESSION<br />
L + R<br />
---------------<br />
75 µS<br />
PRE-EMPHASIS<br />
---------------<br />
50–15,000 HZ BPF<br />
4.2 MHZ<br />
LPF<br />
41.25 MHZ – FH<br />
AM<br />
MODULATOR<br />
45.75 MHZ<br />
IF VIDEO CARRIER<br />
FM<br />
MODULATOR<br />
41.25 MHZ – 6.5FH<br />
IF AUDIO CARRIER<br />
FM<br />
MODULATOR<br />
41.25 MHZ – 5FH<br />
IF AUDIO CARRIER<br />
STEREO<br />
MODULATOR<br />
+<br />
SAW<br />
FILTER<br />
41–47 MHZ<br />
BANDWIDTH<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
MIXER<br />
(UP CONVERTER)<br />
CHANNEL<br />
SELECT<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 259<br />
BANDPASS<br />
FILTER<br />
MODULATED RF<br />
AUDIO / VIDEO<br />
Figure 8.10. Typical RF Modulation Implementation for (M) <strong>NTSC</strong>: BTSC Stereo Audio.
260 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Table 8.1. Analog Broadcast Nominal Frequencies for North <strong>and</strong> South America.<br />
Broadcast<br />
Channel<br />
Video<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Audio<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Channel<br />
Range<br />
(MHz)<br />
Broadcast<br />
Channel<br />
Video<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Audio<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Channel<br />
Range<br />
(MHz)<br />
–<br />
–<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
7<br />
8<br />
9<br />
–<br />
–<br />
55.25<br />
61.25<br />
67.25<br />
77.25<br />
83.25<br />
175.25<br />
181.25<br />
187.25<br />
–<br />
–<br />
59.75<br />
65.75<br />
71.75<br />
81.75<br />
87.75<br />
179.75<br />
185.75<br />
191.75<br />
–<br />
–<br />
54–60<br />
60–66<br />
66–72<br />
76–82<br />
82–88<br />
174–180<br />
180–186<br />
186–192<br />
40<br />
41<br />
42<br />
43<br />
44<br />
45<br />
46<br />
47<br />
48<br />
49<br />
627.25<br />
633.25<br />
639.25<br />
645.25<br />
651.25<br />
657.25<br />
663.25<br />
669.25<br />
675.25<br />
681.25<br />
631.75<br />
637.75<br />
643.75<br />
649.75<br />
655.75<br />
661.75<br />
667.75<br />
673.75<br />
679.75<br />
685.75<br />
626–632<br />
632–638<br />
638–644<br />
644–650<br />
650–656<br />
656–662<br />
662–668<br />
668–674<br />
674–680<br />
680–686<br />
10<br />
11<br />
12<br />
13<br />
14<br />
15<br />
16<br />
17<br />
18<br />
19<br />
193.25<br />
199.25<br />
205.25<br />
211.25<br />
471.25<br />
477.25<br />
483.25<br />
489.25<br />
495.25<br />
501.25<br />
197.75<br />
203.75<br />
209.75<br />
215.75<br />
475.75<br />
481.75<br />
487.75<br />
493.75<br />
499.75<br />
505.75<br />
192–198<br />
198–204<br />
204–210<br />
210–216<br />
470–476<br />
476–482<br />
482–488<br />
488–494<br />
494–500<br />
500–506<br />
50<br />
51<br />
52<br />
53<br />
54<br />
55<br />
56<br />
57<br />
58<br />
59<br />
687.25<br />
693.25<br />
699.25<br />
705.25<br />
711.25<br />
717.25<br />
723.25<br />
729.25<br />
735.25<br />
741.25<br />
691.75<br />
697.75<br />
703.75<br />
709.75<br />
715.75<br />
721.75<br />
727.75<br />
733.75<br />
739.75<br />
745.75<br />
686–692<br />
692–698<br />
698–704<br />
704–710<br />
710–716<br />
716–722<br />
722–728<br />
728–734<br />
734–740<br />
740–746<br />
20<br />
21<br />
22<br />
23<br />
24<br />
25<br />
26<br />
27<br />
28<br />
29<br />
507.25<br />
513.25<br />
519.25<br />
525.25<br />
531.25<br />
537.25<br />
543.25<br />
549.25<br />
555.25<br />
561.25<br />
511.75<br />
517.75<br />
523.75<br />
529.75<br />
535.75<br />
541.75<br />
547.75<br />
553.75<br />
559.75<br />
565.75<br />
506–512<br />
512–518<br />
518–524<br />
524–530<br />
530–536<br />
536–542<br />
542–548<br />
548–554<br />
554–560<br />
560–566<br />
60<br />
61<br />
62<br />
63<br />
64<br />
65<br />
66<br />
67<br />
68<br />
69<br />
747.25<br />
753.25<br />
759.25<br />
765.25<br />
771.25<br />
777.25<br />
783.25<br />
789.25<br />
795.25<br />
801.25<br />
751.75<br />
757.75<br />
763.75<br />
769.75<br />
775.75<br />
781.75<br />
787.75<br />
793.75<br />
799.75<br />
805.75<br />
746–752<br />
752–758<br />
758–764<br />
764–770<br />
770–776<br />
776–782<br />
782–788<br />
788–794<br />
794–800<br />
800–806<br />
30<br />
31<br />
32<br />
33<br />
34<br />
35<br />
36<br />
37<br />
38<br />
39<br />
567.25<br />
573.25<br />
579.25<br />
585.25<br />
591.25<br />
597.25<br />
603.25<br />
609.25<br />
615.25<br />
621.25<br />
571.75<br />
577.75<br />
583.75<br />
589.75<br />
595.75<br />
601.75<br />
607.75<br />
613.75<br />
619.75<br />
625.75<br />
566–572<br />
572–578<br />
578–584<br />
584–590<br />
590–596<br />
596–602<br />
602–608<br />
608–614<br />
614–620<br />
620–626
<strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 261<br />
Table 8.2. Analog Broadcast Nominal Frequencies for Japan.<br />
Broadcast<br />
Channel<br />
Video<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Audio<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Channel<br />
Range<br />
(MHz)<br />
Broadcast<br />
Channel<br />
Video<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Audio<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Channel<br />
Range<br />
(MHz)<br />
–<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
7<br />
8<br />
9<br />
–<br />
91.25<br />
97.25<br />
103.25<br />
171.25<br />
177.25<br />
183.25<br />
189.25<br />
193.25<br />
199.25<br />
–<br />
95.75<br />
101.75<br />
107.75<br />
175.75<br />
181.75<br />
187.75<br />
193.75<br />
197.75<br />
203.75<br />
–<br />
90–96<br />
96–102<br />
102–108<br />
170–176<br />
176–182<br />
182–188<br />
188–194<br />
192–198<br />
198–204<br />
40<br />
41<br />
42<br />
43<br />
44<br />
45<br />
46<br />
47<br />
48<br />
49<br />
633.25<br />
639.25<br />
645.25<br />
651.25<br />
657.25<br />
663.25<br />
669.25<br />
675.25<br />
681.25<br />
687.25<br />
637.75<br />
643.75<br />
649.75<br />
655.75<br />
661.75<br />
667.75<br />
673.75<br />
679.75<br />
685.75<br />
691.75<br />
632–638<br />
638–644<br />
644–650<br />
650–656<br />
656–662<br />
662–668<br />
668–674<br />
674–680<br />
680–686<br />
686–692<br />
10<br />
11<br />
12<br />
13<br />
14<br />
15<br />
16<br />
17<br />
18<br />
19<br />
205.25<br />
211.25<br />
217.25<br />
471.25<br />
477.25<br />
483.25<br />
489.25<br />
495.25<br />
501.25<br />
507.25<br />
209.75<br />
215.75<br />
221.75<br />
475.75<br />
481.75<br />
487.75<br />
493.75<br />
499.75<br />
505.75<br />
511.75<br />
204–210<br />
210–216<br />
216–222<br />
470–476<br />
476–482<br />
482–488<br />
488–494<br />
494–500<br />
500–506<br />
506–512<br />
50<br />
51<br />
52<br />
53<br />
54<br />
55<br />
56<br />
57<br />
58<br />
59<br />
693.25<br />
699.25<br />
705.25<br />
711.25<br />
717.25<br />
723.25<br />
729.25<br />
735.25<br />
741.25<br />
747.25<br />
697.75<br />
703.75<br />
709.75<br />
715.75<br />
721.75<br />
727.75<br />
733.75<br />
739.75<br />
745.75<br />
751.75<br />
692–698<br />
698–704<br />
704–710<br />
710–716<br />
716–722<br />
722–728<br />
728–734<br />
734–740<br />
740–746<br />
746–752<br />
20<br />
21<br />
22<br />
23<br />
24<br />
25<br />
26<br />
27<br />
28<br />
29<br />
513.25<br />
519.25<br />
525.25<br />
531.25<br />
537.25<br />
543.25<br />
549.25<br />
555.25<br />
561.25<br />
567.25<br />
517.75<br />
523.75<br />
529.75<br />
535.75<br />
541.75<br />
547.75<br />
553.75<br />
559.75<br />
565.75<br />
571.75<br />
512–518<br />
518–524<br />
524–530<br />
530–536<br />
536–542<br />
542–548<br />
548–554<br />
554–560<br />
560–566<br />
566–572<br />
60<br />
61<br />
62<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
753.25<br />
759.25<br />
765.25<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
757.75<br />
763.75<br />
769.75<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
752–758<br />
758–764<br />
764–770<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
30<br />
31<br />
32<br />
33<br />
34<br />
35<br />
36<br />
37<br />
38<br />
39<br />
573.25<br />
579.25<br />
585.25<br />
591.25<br />
597.25<br />
603.25<br />
609.25<br />
615.25<br />
621.25<br />
627.25<br />
577.75<br />
583.75<br />
589.75<br />
595.75<br />
601.75<br />
607.75<br />
613.75<br />
619.75<br />
625.75<br />
631.75<br />
572–578<br />
578–584<br />
584–590<br />
590–596<br />
596–602<br />
602–608<br />
608–614<br />
614–620<br />
620–626<br />
626–632
262 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Table 8.3a. Analog Cable TV Nominal Frequencies for USA for Incrementally Related<br />
Carrier (IRC) Systems. For Harmonically Related Carrier (HRC) systems, subtract 1.25<br />
MHz.<br />
Cable<br />
Channel<br />
Video<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Audio<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Channel<br />
Range<br />
(MHz)<br />
Cable<br />
Channel<br />
Video<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Audio<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Channel<br />
Range<br />
(MHz)<br />
–<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
7<br />
8<br />
9<br />
–<br />
73.25<br />
55.25<br />
61.25<br />
67.25<br />
77.25<br />
83.25<br />
175.25<br />
181.25<br />
187.25<br />
–<br />
77.75<br />
59.75<br />
65.75<br />
71.75<br />
81.75<br />
87.75<br />
179.75<br />
185.75<br />
191.75<br />
–<br />
72–78<br />
54–60<br />
60–66<br />
66–72<br />
76–82<br />
82–88<br />
174–180<br />
180–186<br />
186–192<br />
40<br />
41<br />
42<br />
43<br />
44<br />
45<br />
46<br />
47<br />
48<br />
49<br />
319.25<br />
325.25<br />
331.25<br />
337.25<br />
343.25<br />
349.25<br />
355.25<br />
361.25<br />
367.25<br />
373.25<br />
323.75<br />
329.75<br />
335.75<br />
341.75<br />
347.75<br />
353.75<br />
359.75<br />
365.75<br />
371.75<br />
377.75<br />
318–324<br />
324–330<br />
330–336<br />
336–342<br />
342–348<br />
348–354<br />
354–360<br />
360–366<br />
366–372<br />
372–378<br />
10<br />
11<br />
12<br />
13<br />
14<br />
15<br />
16<br />
17<br />
18<br />
19<br />
193.25<br />
199.25<br />
205.25<br />
211.25<br />
121.25<br />
127.25<br />
133.25<br />
139.25<br />
145.25<br />
151.25<br />
197.75<br />
203.75<br />
209.75<br />
215.75<br />
125.75<br />
131.75<br />
137.75<br />
143.75<br />
149.75<br />
155.75<br />
192–198<br />
198–204<br />
204–210<br />
210–216<br />
120–126<br />
126–132<br />
132–138<br />
138–144<br />
144–150<br />
150–156<br />
50<br />
51<br />
52<br />
53<br />
54<br />
55<br />
56<br />
57<br />
58<br />
59<br />
379.25<br />
385.25<br />
391.25<br />
397.25<br />
403.25<br />
409.25<br />
415.25<br />
421.25<br />
427.25<br />
433.25<br />
383.75<br />
389.75<br />
395.75<br />
401.75<br />
407.75<br />
413.75<br />
419.75<br />
425.75<br />
431.75<br />
437.75<br />
378–384<br />
384–390<br />
390–396<br />
396–402<br />
402–408<br />
408–414<br />
414–420<br />
420–426<br />
426–432<br />
432–438<br />
20<br />
21<br />
22<br />
23<br />
24<br />
25<br />
26<br />
27<br />
28<br />
29<br />
157.25<br />
163.25<br />
169.25<br />
217.25<br />
223.25<br />
229.25<br />
235.25<br />
241.25<br />
247.25<br />
253.25<br />
161.75<br />
167.75<br />
173.75<br />
221.75<br />
227.75<br />
233.75<br />
239.75<br />
245.75<br />
251.75<br />
257.75<br />
156–162<br />
162–168<br />
168–174<br />
216–222<br />
222–228<br />
228–234<br />
234–240<br />
240–246<br />
246–252<br />
252–258<br />
60<br />
61<br />
62<br />
63<br />
64<br />
65<br />
66<br />
67<br />
68<br />
69<br />
439.25<br />
445.55<br />
451.25<br />
457.25<br />
463.25<br />
469.25<br />
475.25<br />
481.25<br />
487.25<br />
493.25<br />
443.75<br />
449.75<br />
455.75<br />
461.75<br />
467.75<br />
473.75<br />
479.75<br />
485.75<br />
491.75<br />
497.75<br />
438–444<br />
444–450<br />
450–456<br />
456–462<br />
462–468<br />
468–474<br />
474–480<br />
480–486<br />
486–492<br />
492–498<br />
30<br />
31<br />
32<br />
33<br />
34<br />
35<br />
36<br />
37<br />
38<br />
39<br />
259.25<br />
265.25<br />
271.25<br />
277.25<br />
283.25<br />
289.25<br />
295.25<br />
301.25<br />
307.25<br />
313.25<br />
263.75<br />
269.75<br />
275.75<br />
281.75<br />
287.75<br />
293.75<br />
299.75<br />
305.75<br />
311.75<br />
317.75<br />
258–264<br />
264–270<br />
270–276<br />
276–282<br />
282–288<br />
288–294<br />
294–300<br />
300–306<br />
306–312<br />
312–318<br />
70<br />
71<br />
72<br />
73<br />
74<br />
75<br />
76<br />
77<br />
78<br />
79<br />
499.25<br />
505.25<br />
511.25<br />
517.25<br />
523.25<br />
529.25<br />
535.25<br />
541.25<br />
547.25<br />
553.25<br />
503.75<br />
509.75<br />
515.75<br />
521.75<br />
527.75<br />
533.75<br />
539.75<br />
545.75<br />
551.75<br />
557.75<br />
498–504<br />
504–510<br />
510–516<br />
516–522<br />
522–528<br />
528–534<br />
534–540<br />
540–546<br />
546–552<br />
552–558
<strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 263<br />
Table 8.3b. Analog Cable TV Nominal Frequencies for USA for Incrementally Related<br />
Carrier (IRC) Systems. For Harmonically Related Carrier (HRC) systems, subtract<br />
1.25 MHz. T channels are reverse (return) channels for two-way applications.<br />
Cable<br />
Channel<br />
Video<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Audio<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Channel<br />
Range<br />
(MHz)<br />
Cable<br />
Channel<br />
Video<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Audio<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Channel<br />
Range<br />
(MHz)<br />
80<br />
81<br />
82<br />
83<br />
84<br />
85<br />
86<br />
87<br />
88<br />
89<br />
559.25<br />
565.25<br />
571.25<br />
577.25<br />
583.25<br />
589.25<br />
595.25<br />
601.25<br />
607.25<br />
613.25<br />
563.75<br />
569.75<br />
575.75<br />
581.75<br />
587.75<br />
593.75<br />
599.75<br />
605.75<br />
611.75<br />
617.75<br />
558–564<br />
564–570<br />
570–576<br />
576–582<br />
582–588<br />
588–594<br />
594–600<br />
600–606<br />
606–612<br />
612–618<br />
120<br />
121<br />
122<br />
123<br />
124<br />
125<br />
126<br />
127<br />
128<br />
129<br />
769.25<br />
775.25<br />
781.25<br />
787.25<br />
793.25<br />
799.25<br />
805.25<br />
811.25<br />
817.25<br />
823.25<br />
773.75<br />
779.75<br />
785.75<br />
791.75<br />
797.75<br />
803.75<br />
809.75<br />
815.75<br />
821.75<br />
827.75<br />
768–774<br />
774–780<br />
780–786<br />
786–792<br />
792–798<br />
798–804<br />
804–810<br />
810–816<br />
816–822<br />
822–828<br />
90<br />
91<br />
92<br />
93<br />
94<br />
95<br />
96<br />
97<br />
98<br />
99<br />
619.25<br />
625.25<br />
631.25<br />
637.25<br />
643.25<br />
91.25<br />
97.25<br />
103.25<br />
109.25<br />
115.25<br />
623.75<br />
629.75<br />
635.75<br />
641.75<br />
647.75<br />
95.75<br />
101.75<br />
107.75<br />
113.75<br />
119.75<br />
618–624<br />
624–630<br />
630–636<br />
636–642<br />
642–648<br />
90–96<br />
96–102<br />
102–108<br />
108–114<br />
114–120<br />
130<br />
131<br />
132<br />
133<br />
134<br />
135<br />
136<br />
137<br />
138<br />
139<br />
829.25<br />
835.25<br />
841.25<br />
847.25<br />
853.25<br />
859.25<br />
865.25<br />
871.25<br />
877.25<br />
883.25<br />
833.75<br />
839.75<br />
845.75<br />
851.75<br />
857.75<br />
863.75<br />
869.75<br />
875.75<br />
881.75<br />
887.75<br />
828–834<br />
834–840<br />
840–846<br />
846–852<br />
852–858<br />
858–864<br />
864–870<br />
870–876<br />
876–882<br />
882–888<br />
100<br />
101<br />
102<br />
103<br />
104<br />
105<br />
106<br />
107<br />
108<br />
109<br />
649.25<br />
655.25<br />
661.25<br />
667.25<br />
673.25<br />
679.25<br />
685.25<br />
691.25<br />
697.25<br />
703.25<br />
653.75<br />
659.75<br />
665.75<br />
671.75<br />
677.75<br />
683.75<br />
689.75<br />
695.75<br />
701.75<br />
707.75<br />
648–654<br />
654–660<br />
660–666<br />
666–672<br />
672–678<br />
678–684<br />
684–690<br />
690–696<br />
696–702<br />
702–708<br />
140<br />
141<br />
142<br />
143<br />
144<br />
145<br />
146<br />
147<br />
148<br />
149<br />
889.25<br />
895.25<br />
901.25<br />
907.25<br />
913.25<br />
919.25<br />
925.25<br />
931.25<br />
937.25<br />
943.25<br />
893.75<br />
899.75<br />
905.75<br />
911.75<br />
917.75<br />
923.75<br />
929.75<br />
935.75<br />
941.75<br />
947.75<br />
888–894<br />
894–900<br />
900–906<br />
906–912<br />
912–918<br />
918–924<br />
924–930<br />
930–936<br />
936–942<br />
942–948<br />
110<br />
111<br />
112<br />
113<br />
114<br />
115<br />
116<br />
117<br />
118<br />
119<br />
709.25<br />
715.25<br />
721.25<br />
727.25<br />
733.25<br />
739.25<br />
745.25<br />
751.25<br />
757.25<br />
763.25<br />
713.75<br />
719.75<br />
725.75<br />
731.75<br />
737.75<br />
743.75<br />
749.75<br />
755.75<br />
761.75<br />
767.75<br />
708–714<br />
714–720<br />
720–726<br />
726–732<br />
732–738<br />
738–744<br />
744–750<br />
750–756<br />
756–762<br />
762–768<br />
150<br />
151<br />
152<br />
153<br />
154<br />
155<br />
156<br />
157<br />
158<br />
–<br />
949.25<br />
955.25<br />
961.25<br />
967.25<br />
973.25<br />
979.25<br />
985.25<br />
991.25<br />
997.25<br />
–<br />
953.75<br />
959.75<br />
965.75<br />
971.75<br />
977.75<br />
983.75<br />
989.75<br />
995.75<br />
1001.75<br />
–<br />
948–954<br />
954–960<br />
960–966<br />
966–972<br />
972–978<br />
978–984<br />
984–990<br />
990–996<br />
996–1002<br />
–<br />
T7<br />
T8<br />
T9<br />
T10<br />
8.25<br />
14.25<br />
20.25<br />
26.25<br />
7–13<br />
13–19<br />
19–25<br />
25–31<br />
T11<br />
T13<br />
T13<br />
–<br />
32.25<br />
38.25<br />
44.25<br />
–<br />
31–37<br />
37–43<br />
43–49<br />
–
264 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Table 8.4. Analog Cable TV Nominal Frequencies for Japan.<br />
Cable<br />
Channel<br />
Video<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Audio<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Channel<br />
Range<br />
(MHz)<br />
Cable<br />
Channel<br />
Video<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Audio<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Channel<br />
Range<br />
(MHz)<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
13<br />
14<br />
15<br />
16<br />
17<br />
18<br />
19<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
109.25<br />
115.25<br />
121.25<br />
127.25<br />
133.25<br />
139.25<br />
145.25<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
113.75<br />
119.75<br />
125.75<br />
131.75<br />
137.75<br />
143.75<br />
149.75<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
108–114<br />
114–120<br />
120–126<br />
126–132<br />
132–138<br />
138–144<br />
144–150<br />
40<br />
41<br />
42<br />
46<br />
44<br />
45<br />
46<br />
47<br />
48<br />
49<br />
325.25<br />
331.25<br />
337.25<br />
343.25<br />
349.25<br />
355.25<br />
361.25<br />
367.25<br />
373.25<br />
379.25<br />
329.75<br />
335.75<br />
341.75<br />
347.75<br />
353.75<br />
359.75<br />
365.75<br />
371.75<br />
377.75<br />
383.75<br />
324–330<br />
330–336<br />
336–342<br />
342–348<br />
348–354<br />
354–360<br />
360–366<br />
366–372<br />
372–378<br />
378–384<br />
20<br />
21<br />
22<br />
23<br />
24<br />
25<br />
26<br />
27<br />
28<br />
29<br />
151.25<br />
157.25<br />
165.25<br />
223.25<br />
231.25<br />
237.25<br />
243.25<br />
249.25<br />
253.25<br />
259.25<br />
155.75<br />
161.75<br />
169.75<br />
227.75<br />
235.75<br />
241.75<br />
247.75<br />
253.75<br />
257.75<br />
263.75<br />
150–156<br />
156–162<br />
164–170<br />
222–228<br />
230–236<br />
236–242<br />
242–248<br />
248–254<br />
252–258<br />
258–264<br />
50<br />
51<br />
52<br />
53<br />
54<br />
55<br />
56<br />
57<br />
58<br />
59<br />
385.25<br />
391.25<br />
397.25<br />
403.25<br />
409.25<br />
415.25<br />
421.25<br />
427.25<br />
433.25<br />
439.25<br />
389.75<br />
395.75<br />
401.75<br />
407.75<br />
413.75<br />
419.75<br />
425.75<br />
431.75<br />
437.75<br />
443.75<br />
384–390<br />
390–396<br />
396–402<br />
402–408<br />
408–414<br />
414–420<br />
420–426<br />
426–432<br />
432–438<br />
438–444<br />
30<br />
31<br />
32<br />
33<br />
34<br />
35<br />
36<br />
37<br />
38<br />
39<br />
265.25<br />
271.25<br />
277.25<br />
283.25<br />
289.25<br />
295.25<br />
301.25<br />
307.25<br />
313.25<br />
319.25<br />
269.75<br />
275.75<br />
281.75<br />
287.75<br />
293.75<br />
299.75<br />
305.75<br />
311.75<br />
317.75<br />
323.75<br />
264–270<br />
270–276<br />
276–282<br />
282–288<br />
288–294<br />
294–300<br />
300–306<br />
306–312<br />
312–318<br />
318–324<br />
60<br />
61<br />
62<br />
63<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
445.25<br />
451.25<br />
457.25<br />
463.25<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
449.75<br />
455.75<br />
461.75<br />
467.75<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
444–450<br />
450–456<br />
456–462<br />
462–468<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–
The following countries use the (M) <strong>NTSC</strong><br />
st<strong>and</strong>ard.<br />
Antigua Japan (<strong>NTSC</strong>–J)<br />
Aruba Korea, South<br />
Bahamas Mexico<br />
Barbados Montserrat<br />
Belize Myanmar<br />
Bermuda Nicaragua<br />
Bolivia Panama<br />
Canada Peru<br />
Chile Philippines<br />
Colombia Puerto Rico<br />
Costa Rica St. Kitts <strong>and</strong> Nevis<br />
Cuba Samoa<br />
Curacao Suriname<br />
Dominican Republic Taiwan<br />
Ecuador Trinidad/Tobago<br />
El Salvador United States of<br />
Guam America<br />
Guatemala Venezuela<br />
Honduras Virgin Isl<strong>and</strong>s<br />
Jamaica<br />
Luminance Equation Derivation<br />
The equation for generating luminance from<br />
RGB is determined by the chromaticities of the<br />
three primary colors used by the receiver <strong>and</strong><br />
what color white actually is.<br />
The chromaticities of the RGB primaries<br />
<strong>and</strong> reference white (CIE illuminate C) were<br />
specified in the 1953 <strong>NTSC</strong> st<strong>and</strong>ard to be:<br />
R: xr =0.67 yr = 0.33 zr = 0.00<br />
G: xg = 0.21 yg =0.71zg =0.08<br />
B: xb = 0.14 yb =0.08zb =0.78<br />
white: xw = 0.3101<br />
zw = 0.3737<br />
yw = 0.3162<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 265<br />
where x <strong>and</strong> y are the specified CIE 1931 chromaticity<br />
coordinates; z is calculated by knowing<br />
that x + y + z = 1.<br />
Luminance is calculated as a weighted sum<br />
of RGB, with the weights representing the<br />
actual contributions of each of the RGB primaries<br />
in generating the luminance of reference<br />
white. We find the linear combination of RGB<br />
that gives reference white by solving the equation:<br />
xr xg xb yr yg yb zr zg zb Kr Kg Kb xw ⁄ yw 1<br />
zw ⁄ yw Rearranging to solve for K r ,K g ,<strong>and</strong>K b yields:<br />
K r<br />
K g<br />
K b<br />
xw ⁄ yw 1<br />
zw ⁄ yw Substituting the known values gives us the<br />
solution for K r ,K g ,<strong>and</strong>K b :<br />
K r<br />
K g<br />
K b<br />
=<br />
=<br />
=<br />
=<br />
=<br />
0.3101 ⁄ 0.3162<br />
1<br />
0.3737 ⁄ 0.3162<br />
0.9807<br />
1<br />
1.1818<br />
0.906<br />
0.827<br />
1.430<br />
=<br />
x r x g x b<br />
y r y g y b<br />
z r z g z b<br />
– 1<br />
0.67 0.21 0.14<br />
0.33 0.71 0.08<br />
0.00 0.08 0.78<br />
1.730 – 0.482 – 0.261<br />
– 0.814 1.652 – 0.023<br />
0.083 – 0.169 1.284<br />
– 1
266 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Y is defined to be<br />
or<br />
Y=(K r y r )R´ +(K g y g )G´ +(K b y b )B´<br />
= (0.906)(0.33)R´ + (0.827)(0.71)G´<br />
+ (1.430)(0.08)B´<br />
Y = 0.299R´ + 0.587G´ + 0.114B´<br />
Modern receivers use a different set of<br />
RGB phosphors, resulting in slightly different<br />
chromaticities of the RGB primaries <strong>and</strong> reference<br />
white (CIE illuminate D 65 ):<br />
R: xr = 0.630 yr = 0.340 zr = 0.030<br />
G: xg = 0.310 yg = 0.595 zg = 0.095<br />
B: xb = 0.155 yb = 0.070 zb = 0.775<br />
white: xw = 0.3127<br />
zw = 0.3583<br />
yw = 0.3290<br />
where x <strong>and</strong> y are the specified CIE 1931 chromaticity<br />
coordinates; z is calculated by knowing<br />
that x + y + z = 1. Once again, substituting<br />
the known values gives us the solution for K r ,<br />
K g ,<strong>and</strong>K b :<br />
Kr Kg Kb =<br />
=<br />
=<br />
0.3127 ⁄ 0.3290<br />
1<br />
0.3583 ⁄ 0.3290<br />
0.6243<br />
1.1770<br />
1.2362<br />
0.630 0.310 0.155<br />
0.340 0.595 0.070<br />
0.030 0.095 0.775<br />
– 1<br />
Since Y is defined to be<br />
Y=(K r y r )R´ +(K g y g )G´ +(K b y b )B´<br />
= (0.6243)(0.340)R´ + (1.1770)(0.595)G´<br />
+ (1.2362)(0.070)B´<br />
this results in:<br />
Y = 0.212R´ + 0.700G´ +0.086B´<br />
However, the st<strong>and</strong>ard Y = 0.299R´ +<br />
0.587G´ + 0.114B´ equation is still used. Adjustments<br />
are in the receiver to minimize color<br />
errors.<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Europe delayed adopting a color television<br />
st<strong>and</strong>ard, evaluating various systems between<br />
1953 <strong>and</strong> 1967 that were compatible with their<br />
625-line, 50-field-per-second, 2:1 interlaced<br />
monochrome st<strong>and</strong>ard. The <strong>NTSC</strong> specification<br />
was modified to overcome the high order<br />
of phase <strong>and</strong> amplitude integrity required during<br />
broadcast to avoid color distortion. The<br />
Phase Alternation Line (<strong>PAL</strong>) system implements<br />
a line-by-line reversal of the phase of<br />
one of the color components, originally relying<br />
on the eye to average any color distortions to<br />
the correct color. Broadcasting began in 1967<br />
in Germany <strong>and</strong> the United Kingdom, with<br />
each using a slightly different variant of the<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> system.
Luminance Information<br />
The monochrome luminance (Y) signal is<br />
derived from R´G´B´:<br />
Y = 0.299R´ + 0.587G´ + 0.114B´<br />
As with <strong>NTSC</strong>, the luminance signal occupies<br />
the entire video b<strong>and</strong>width. <strong>PAL</strong> has several<br />
variations, depending on the video<br />
b<strong>and</strong>width <strong>and</strong> placement of the audio subcarrier.<br />
The composite video signal has a b<strong>and</strong>width<br />
of 4.2, 5.0, 5.5, or 6.0 MHz, depending on<br />
the specific <strong>PAL</strong> st<strong>and</strong>ard.<br />
Color Information<br />
To transmit color information, U <strong>and</strong> V are<br />
used:<br />
U = 0.492(B´ –Y)<br />
V = 0.877(R´ –Y)<br />
U <strong>and</strong> V have a typical b<strong>and</strong>width of 1.3 MHz.<br />
Color Modulation<br />
As in the <strong>NTSC</strong> system, U <strong>and</strong> V are used to<br />
modulate the color subcarrier using two balanced<br />
modulators operating in phase quadrature:<br />
one modulator is driven by the subcarrier<br />
at sine phase, the other modulator is driven by<br />
the subcarrier at cosine phase. The outputs of<br />
the modulators are added together to form the<br />
modulated chrominance signal:<br />
C=Usinωt ± Vcosωt<br />
ω =2πFSC F SC = 4.43361875 MHz (± 5Hz)<br />
for (B, D, G, H, I, N) <strong>PAL</strong><br />
F SC = 3.58205625 MHz (± 5Hz)for<br />
(N C )<strong>PAL</strong><br />
<strong>PAL</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 267<br />
F SC = 3.57561149 MHz (± 10 Hz) for<br />
(M) <strong>PAL</strong><br />
In <strong>PAL</strong>, the phase of V is reversed every<br />
other line. V was chosen for the reversal process<br />
since it has a lower gain factor than U <strong>and</strong><br />
therefore is less susceptible to a one-half F H<br />
switching rate imbalance. The result of alternating<br />
the V phase at the line rate is that any<br />
color subcarrier phase errors produce complementary<br />
errors, allowing line-to-line averaging<br />
at the receiver to cancel the errors <strong>and</strong> generate<br />
the correct hue with slightly reduced saturation.<br />
This technique requires the <strong>PAL</strong><br />
receiver to be able to determine the correct V<br />
phase. This is done using a technique known<br />
as AB sync, <strong>PAL</strong> sync, <strong>PAL</strong> Switch, or “swinging<br />
burst,” consisting of alternating the phase<br />
of the color burst by ±45° atthelinerate.The<br />
UV vector diagrams are shown in Figures 8.11<br />
<strong>and</strong> 8.12.<br />
“Simple” <strong>PAL</strong> decoders rely on the eye to<br />
average the line-by-line hue errors. “St<strong>and</strong>ard”<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> decoders use a 1-H delay line to separate<br />
U from V in an averaging process. Both implementations<br />
have the problem of Hanover bars,<br />
in which pairs of adjacent lines have a real <strong>and</strong><br />
complementary hue error. Chrominance vertical<br />
resolution is reduced as a result of the line<br />
averaging process.<br />
Composite Video Generation<br />
The modulated chrominance is added to the<br />
luminance information along with appropriate<br />
horizontal <strong>and</strong> vertical sync signals, blanking<br />
signals, <strong>and</strong> color burst signals, to generate the<br />
composite color video waveform shown in Figure<br />
8.13.<br />
composite<strong>PAL</strong>=Y+Usinωt<br />
± Vcosωt+timing
268 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
YELLOW<br />
167˚<br />
YELLOW<br />
193˚<br />
BURST<br />
135˚<br />
67<br />
GREEN<br />
241˚<br />
GREEN<br />
120˚<br />
RED<br />
103˚<br />
95<br />
+ V<br />
90˚<br />
100<br />
80<br />
60<br />
40<br />
20<br />
89 95<br />
RED<br />
257˚<br />
+ V<br />
90˚<br />
CYAN<br />
283˚<br />
IRE SCALE UNITS<br />
CYAN<br />
77˚<br />
89<br />
MAGENTA<br />
61˚<br />
67<br />
MAGENTA<br />
300˚<br />
+ U<br />
0˚<br />
BLUE<br />
347˚<br />
Figure 8.11. UV Vector Diagram for 75% Color Bars. Line [n],<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> Switch = zero.<br />
BURST<br />
225˚<br />
67<br />
89<br />
95<br />
40<br />
20<br />
100<br />
80<br />
60<br />
IRE SCALE UNITS<br />
Figure 8.12. UV Vector Diagram for 75% Color Bars. Line [n<br />
+ 1], <strong>PAL</strong> Switch = one.<br />
95<br />
89<br />
67<br />
BLUE<br />
13˚<br />
+ U<br />
0˚
100 IRE<br />
43 IRE<br />
21.43 IRE<br />
21.43 IRE<br />
COLOR BURST<br />
(10 ± 1 CYCLES)<br />
BLANK LEVEL<br />
LUMINANCE LEVEL<br />
Figure 8.13. (B, D, G, H, I, N C)<strong>PAL</strong>Composite<br />
Video Signal for 75% Color Bars.<br />
WHITE<br />
YELLOW<br />
CYAN<br />
GREEN<br />
MAGENTA<br />
RED<br />
BLUE<br />
PHASE = HUE<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 269<br />
BLACK<br />
WHITE LEVEL<br />
BLACK / BLANK LEVEL<br />
SYNC LEVEL<br />
COLOR<br />
SATURATION
270 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
The b<strong>and</strong>width of the resulting composite<br />
video signal is shown in Figure 8.14.<br />
Like <strong>NTSC</strong>, the luminance components are<br />
spaced at F H intervals due to horizontal blanking.<br />
Since the V component is switched symmetrically<br />
at one-half the line rate, only odd<br />
harmonics are generated, resulting in V components<br />
that are spaced at intervals of F H .The<br />
V components are spaced at half-line intervals<br />
from the U components, which also have F H<br />
spacing. If the subcarrier had a half-line offset<br />
like <strong>NTSC</strong> uses, the U components would be<br />
perfectly interleaved, but the V components<br />
would coincide with the Y components <strong>and</strong><br />
thus not be interleaved, creating vertical stationary<br />
dot patterns. For this reason, <strong>PAL</strong> uses<br />
a 1/4 line offset for the subcarrier frequency:<br />
FSC = ((1135/4) + (1/625)) FH for (B, D, G, H, I, N) <strong>PAL</strong><br />
FSC = (909/4) FH for (M) <strong>PAL</strong><br />
F SC = ((917/4) + (1/625)) F H<br />
for (N C )<strong>PAL</strong><br />
The additional (1/625) F H factor (equal to<br />
25 Hz) provides motion to the color dot pattern,<br />
reducing its visibility. Figure 8.15 illustrates<br />
the resulting frequency interleaving.<br />
Eight complete fields are required to repeat a<br />
specific sample position, as shown in Figures<br />
8.16 <strong>and</strong> 8.17.<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> Variations<br />
There is a variation of <strong>PAL</strong>, “noninterlaced<br />
<strong>PAL</strong>”, shown in Figure 8.18. It is a 312-line, 50<br />
frames-per-second version of <strong>PAL</strong> common<br />
among video games <strong>and</strong> on-screen displays.<br />
This format is identical to st<strong>and</strong>ard <strong>PAL</strong>,<br />
except that there are 312 lines per frame.<br />
The most common <strong>PAL</strong> st<strong>and</strong>ards are<br />
showninFigure8.19.<br />
RF Modulation<br />
Figures 8.20 <strong>and</strong> 8.21 illustrate the process of<br />
converting baseb<strong>and</strong> (G) <strong>PAL</strong> composite video<br />
to a RF (radio frequency) signal. The process<br />
for the other <strong>PAL</strong> st<strong>and</strong>ards is similar, except<br />
primarily the different video b<strong>and</strong>widths <strong>and</strong><br />
subcarrier frequencies.<br />
Figure 8.20a shows the frequency spectrum<br />
of a (G) <strong>PAL</strong> baseb<strong>and</strong> composite video<br />
signal. It is similar to Figure 8.14, however, Figure<br />
8.14 only shows the upper sideb<strong>and</strong> for<br />
simplicity. The “video carrier” notation at 0<br />
MHz serves only as a reference point for comparison<br />
with Figure 8.20b.<br />
Figure 8.20b shows the audio/video signal<br />
as it resides within an 8-MHz channel. The<br />
video signal has been lowpass filtered, most of<br />
the lower sideb<strong>and</strong> has been removed, <strong>and</strong><br />
audio information has been added. Note that<br />
(H) <strong>and</strong> (I) <strong>PAL</strong> have a vestigial sideb<strong>and</strong> of<br />
1.25 MHz, rather than 0.75 MHz.<br />
Figure 8.20c details the information<br />
present on the audio subcarrier for analog stereo<br />
operation.<br />
As shown in Figure 8.21, back porch clamping<br />
of the analog video signal ensures that the<br />
back porch level is constant, regardless of<br />
changes in the average picture level. The video<br />
signal is then lowpass filtered to 5.0 MHz <strong>and</strong><br />
drives the AM (amplitude modulation) video<br />
modulator. The sync level corresponds to 100%<br />
modulation; the blanking <strong>and</strong> white modulation<br />
levels are dependent on the specific version of<br />
<strong>PAL</strong>:
AMPLITUDE<br />
Y U<br />
± V<br />
CHROMINANCE<br />
SUBCARRIER<br />
U<br />
± V<br />
0.0 1.0<br />
2.0 3.0 4.0 4.43 5.0 5.5<br />
AMPLITUDE<br />
0.0<br />
(I) <strong>PAL</strong><br />
Y U<br />
± V<br />
CHROMINANCE<br />
SUBCARRIER<br />
U<br />
± V<br />
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 4.43 5.0<br />
(B, G, H) <strong>PAL</strong><br />
Figure 8.14. Video B<strong>and</strong>widths of Some <strong>PAL</strong> Systems.<br />
FH / 4<br />
U<br />
Y<br />
V<br />
FH / 2<br />
FH<br />
U<br />
Y<br />
V<br />
F<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 271<br />
FREQUENCY<br />
(MHZ)<br />
FREQUENCY<br />
(MHZ)<br />
Figure 8.15. Luma <strong>and</strong> Chroma Frequency Interleave Principle.
272 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
BURST<br />
BLANKING<br />
INTERVALS<br />
START<br />
OF<br />
VSYNC<br />
ANALOG<br />
FIELD 1<br />
620 621 622 623 624 625 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 23 24<br />
–U COMPONENT OF BURST PHASE<br />
ANALOG<br />
FIELD 2<br />
308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 336 337<br />
ANALOG<br />
FIELD 3<br />
620 621 622 623 624 625 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 23 24<br />
ANALOG<br />
FIELD 4<br />
308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 336 337<br />
FIELD ONE<br />
FIELD TWO<br />
FIELD THREE<br />
FIELD FOUR<br />
BURST PHASE = REFERENCE PHASE = 135˚ RELATIVE TO U<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> SWITCH = 0, + V COMPONENT<br />
BURST PHASE = REFERENCE PHASE + 90˚ = 225˚ RELATIVE TO U<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> SWITCH = 1, – V COMPONENT<br />
Figure8.16a.Eight-field(B,D,G,H,I,N C ) <strong>PAL</strong> Sequence <strong>and</strong> Burst Blanking.<br />
See Figure 8.5 for equalization <strong>and</strong> serration pulse details.
BURST<br />
BLANKING<br />
INTERVALS<br />
START<br />
OF<br />
VSYNC<br />
ANALOG<br />
FIELD 5<br />
–U COMPONENT OF BURST PHASE<br />
BURST PHASE = REFERENCE PHASE = 135˚ RELATIVE TO U<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> SWITCH = 0, + V COMPONENT<br />
BURST PHASE = REFERENCE PHASE + 90˚ = 225˚ RELATIVE TO U<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> SWITCH = 1, – V COMPONENT<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 273<br />
620 621 622 623 624 625 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 23 24<br />
ANALOG<br />
FIELD 6<br />
308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 336 337<br />
ANALOG<br />
FIELD 7<br />
620 621 622 623 624 625 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 23 24<br />
ANALOG<br />
FIELD 8<br />
308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 336 337<br />
FIELD FIVE<br />
FIELD SIX<br />
FIELD SEVEN<br />
FIELD EIGHT<br />
Figure8.16b.Eight-field(B,D,G,H,I,N C ) <strong>PAL</strong> Sequence <strong>and</strong> Burst Blanking.<br />
See Figure 8.5 for equalization <strong>and</strong> serration pulse details.
274 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
START<br />
OF<br />
VSYNC<br />
ANALOG<br />
FIELD 1 / 5<br />
520 521 522 523 524 525 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9<br />
ANALOG<br />
FIELD 2 / 6<br />
258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272<br />
ANALOG<br />
FIELD 3 / 7<br />
520 521 522 523 524 525 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9<br />
ANALOG<br />
FIELD 4 / 8<br />
258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272<br />
BURST PHASE = REFERENCE PHASE = 135˚ RELATIVE TO U<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> SWITCH = 0, + V COMPONENT<br />
BURST PHASE = REFERENCE PHASE + 90˚ = 225˚ RELATIVE TO U<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> SWITCH = 1, – V COMPONENT<br />
Figure 8.17. Eight-field (M) <strong>PAL</strong> Sequence <strong>and</strong> Burst Blanking.<br />
See Figure 8.5 for equalization <strong>and</strong> serration pulse details.
START<br />
OF<br />
VSYNC<br />
BURST PHASE = REFERENCE PHASE = 135˚ RELATIVE TO U<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> SWITCH = 0, + V COMPONENT<br />
BURST PHASE = REFERENCE PHASE + 90˚ = 225˚ RELATIVE TO U<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> SWITCH = 1, – V COMPONENT<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 275<br />
308 309 310 311 312 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 23 24<br />
blanking level (% modulation)<br />
B, G 75%<br />
D, H, M, N 75%<br />
I 76%<br />
white level (% modulation)<br />
B, G, H, M, N 10%<br />
D 10%<br />
I 20%<br />
Note that <strong>PAL</strong> systems use a variety of<br />
video <strong>and</strong> audio IF frequencies (values in<br />
MHz):<br />
video audio<br />
B, G 38.900 33.400<br />
B 36.875 31.375 Australia<br />
D 37.000 30.500 China<br />
D 38.900 32.400 OIRT<br />
I 38.900 32.900<br />
I 39.500 33.500 U.K.<br />
M, N 45.750 41.250<br />
Figure 8.18. Noninterlaced <strong>PAL</strong> Frame Sequence.<br />
At this point, audio information is added on<br />
the audio subcarrier. A monaural L+R audio<br />
signal is processed as shown in Figure 8.21<br />
<strong>and</strong> drives the FM (frequency modulation)<br />
modulator. The output of the FM modulator is<br />
added to the IF video signal.<br />
The SAW filter, used as a vestigial sideb<strong>and</strong><br />
filter, provides filtering of the IF signal.<br />
The mixer, or up converter, mixes the IF signal<br />
with the desired broadcast frequency. Both<br />
sum <strong>and</strong> difference frequencies are generated<br />
by the mixing process, so the difference signal<br />
isextractedbyusingab<strong>and</strong>passfilter.<br />
Stereo Audio (Analog)<br />
The implementation of analog stereo audio<br />
(ITU-R BS.707), also know as Zweiton, is<br />
shown in Figure 8.21. The L+R information is<br />
transmitted on a FM subcarrier. The R information,<br />
or a second L+R audio signal, is transmitted<br />
on a second FM subcarrier at +15.5F H .<br />
If stereo or dual mono signals are present,<br />
the FM subcarrier at +15.5F H is amplitude-
276 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
"I"<br />
LINE / FIELD = 625 / 50<br />
FH = 15.625 KHZ<br />
FV = 50 HZ<br />
FSC = 4.43361875 MHZ<br />
BLANKING SETUP = 0 IRE<br />
VIDEO BANDWIDTH = 5.5 MHZ<br />
AUDIO CARRIER = 5.9996 MHZ<br />
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH = 8 MHZ<br />
"D"<br />
LINE / FIELD = 625 / 50<br />
FH = 15.625 KHZ<br />
FV = 50 HZ<br />
FSC = 4.43361875 MHZ<br />
BLANKING SETUP = 0 IRE<br />
VIDEO BANDWIDTH = 6.0 MHZ<br />
AUDIO CARRIER = 6.5 MHZ<br />
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH = 8 MHZ<br />
QUADRATURE MODULATED SUBCARRIER<br />
PHASE = HUE<br />
AMPLITUDE = SATURATION<br />
LINE ALTERNATION OF V COMPONENT<br />
"B, B1, G, H"<br />
LINE / FIELD = 625 / 50<br />
FH = 15.625 KHZ<br />
FV = 50 HZ<br />
FSC = 4.43361875 MHZ<br />
BLANKING SETUP = 0 IRE<br />
VIDEO BANDWIDTH = 5.0 MHZ<br />
AUDIO CARRIER = 5.5 MHZ<br />
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH:<br />
B = 7 MHZ<br />
B1, G, H = 8 MHZ<br />
"N"<br />
LINE / FIELD = 625 / 50<br />
FH = 15.625 KHZ<br />
FV = 50 HZ<br />
FSC = 4.43361875 MHZ<br />
BLANKING SETUP = 7.5 IRE<br />
VIDEO BANDWIDTH = 5.0 MHZ<br />
AUDIO CARRIER = 5.5 MHZ<br />
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH = 6 MHZ<br />
Figure 8.19. Common <strong>PAL</strong> Systems.<br />
"M"<br />
LINE / FIELD = 525 / 59.94<br />
FH = 15.734 KHZ<br />
FV = 59.94 HZ<br />
FSC = 3.57561149 MHZ<br />
BLANKING SETUP = 7.5 IRE<br />
VIDEO BANDWIDTH = 4.2 MHZ<br />
AUDIO CARRIER = 4.5 MHZ<br />
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH = 6 MHZ<br />
"N C "<br />
LINE / FIELD = 625 / 50<br />
FH = 15.625 KHZ<br />
FV = 50 HZ<br />
FSC = 3.58205625 MHZ<br />
BLANKING SETUP = 0 IRE<br />
VIDEO BANDWIDTH = 4.2 MHZ<br />
AUDIO CARRIER = 4.5 MHZ<br />
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH = 6 MHZ
–5.5<br />
CHROMINANCE<br />
SUBCARRIER<br />
–5.0<br />
–4.43<br />
VIDEO<br />
CARRIER<br />
–1.0 0.0<br />
1.0<br />
4.43 5.0 5.5<br />
VIDEO<br />
CARRIER<br />
(A)<br />
8 MHZ CHANNEL<br />
CHROMINANCE<br />
SUBCARRIER<br />
CHROMINANCE<br />
SUBCARRIER<br />
–4.0 –3.0 –0.75 0.0<br />
1.0<br />
4.43 5.0 5.5<br />
AUDIO<br />
CARRIER<br />
L + R<br />
(FM)<br />
0.75 MHZ<br />
VESTIGIAL<br />
SIDEBAND<br />
–1.25<br />
FH = 15,625 HZ<br />
(B)<br />
R<br />
(FM)<br />
–50 KHZ 0.0 50 KHZ<br />
15.5 FH<br />
– 50 KHZ<br />
15.5 FH<br />
(C)<br />
AUDIO<br />
CARRIER<br />
15.5 FH<br />
+ 50 KHZ<br />
6.75<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 277<br />
FREQUENCY (MHZ)<br />
FREQUENCY (MHZ)<br />
FREQUENCY<br />
Figure 8.20. Transmission Channel for (G) <strong>PAL</strong>. (a) Frequency spectrum of baseb<strong>and</strong> composite<br />
video. (b) Frequency spectrum of typical channel including audio information. (c) Detailed<br />
frequency spectrum of Zweiton analog stereo audio information.
278 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
modulated with a 54.6875 kHz (3.5x F H )subcarrier.<br />
This 54.6875 kHz subcarrier is 50%<br />
amplitude-modulated at 117.5 Hz (F H / 133) to<br />
indicate stereo audio or 274.1 Hz (F H / 57) to<br />
indicate dual mono audio.<br />
Countries that use this system include<br />
Australia, Austria, China, Germany, Italy,<br />
Malaysia, Netherl<strong>and</strong>s, Slovenia, <strong>and</strong> Switzerl<strong>and</strong>.<br />
Stereo Audio (Digital)<br />
The implementation of digital stereo audio<br />
uses NICAM 728 (Near Instantaneous Comp<strong>and</strong>ed<br />
Audio Multiplex), discussed within<br />
BS.707 <strong>and</strong> ETSI EN 300163. It was developed<br />
by the BBC <strong>and</strong> IBA to increase sound quality,<br />
provide multiple channels of digital sound or<br />
AUDIO RIGHT<br />
AUDIO LEFT<br />
(G) <strong>PAL</strong><br />
COMPOSITE<br />
VIDEO<br />
BACK<br />
PORCH<br />
CLAMP<br />
STEREO<br />
PILOT SIGNAL<br />
50 µS<br />
PRE-EMPHASIS<br />
---------------<br />
40–15,000 HZ BPF<br />
L + R<br />
---------------<br />
50 µS<br />
PRE-EMPHASIS<br />
---------------<br />
40–15,000 HZ BPF<br />
5.0 MHZ<br />
LPF<br />
3.5FH<br />
AM<br />
MODULATOR<br />
38.9 MHZ<br />
IF VIDEO CARRIER<br />
117.5 HZ<br />
274.1 HZ<br />
AM<br />
MODULATOR<br />
FM<br />
MODULATOR<br />
33.4 MHZ – 15.5FH<br />
IF AUDIO CARRIER<br />
FM<br />
MODULATOR<br />
33.4 MHZ<br />
IF AUDIO CARRIER<br />
data, <strong>and</strong> be more resistant to transmission<br />
interference.<br />
The subcarrier resides either 5.85 MHz<br />
above the video carrier for (B, G, H) <strong>PAL</strong> systems<br />
or 6.552 MHz above the video carrier for<br />
(I) <strong>PAL</strong> systems.<br />
Countries that use NICAM 728 include<br />
Belgium, Denmark, Finl<strong>and</strong>, France, Hong<br />
Kong, New Zeal<strong>and</strong>, Norway, Singapore, South<br />
Africa, Spain, Sweden, <strong>and</strong> the United Kingdom.<br />
NICAM 728 is a digital system that uses a<br />
32-kHz sampling rate <strong>and</strong> 14-bit resolution. A<br />
bit rate of 728 kbps is used, giving it the name<br />
NICAM 728. Data is transmitted in frames,<br />
with each frame containing 1 ms of audio. As<br />
shown in Figure 8.22, each frame consists of:<br />
+<br />
AM<br />
MODULATOR<br />
SAW<br />
FILTER<br />
33.15–40.15 MHZ<br />
BANDWIDTH<br />
+<br />
MIXER<br />
(UP CONVERTER)<br />
CHANNEL<br />
SELECT<br />
BANDPASS<br />
FILTER<br />
Figure 8.21. Typical RF Modulation Implementation for (G) <strong>PAL</strong>: Zweiton Stereo Audio.<br />
MODULATED RF<br />
AUDIO / VIDEO
8-bit frame alignment word (01001110)<br />
5 control bits (C0–C4)<br />
11 undefined bits (AD0–AD10)<br />
704 audio data bits (A000–A703)<br />
C0 is a “1” for eight successive frames <strong>and</strong><br />
a “0” for the next eight frames, defining a 16frame<br />
sequence. C1–C3 specify the format<br />
transmitted: “000” = one stereo signal with the<br />
left channel being odd-numbered samples <strong>and</strong><br />
the right channel being even-numbered samples,<br />
“010” = two independent mono channels<br />
transmitted in alternate frames, “100” = one<br />
mono channel <strong>and</strong> one 352 kbps data channel<br />
transmitted in alternate frames, “110” = one<br />
704 kbps data channel. C4 is a “1” if the analog<br />
sound is the same as the digital sound.<br />
Stereo Audio Encoding<br />
The thirty-two 14-bit samples (1 ms of audio,<br />
2’s complement format) per channel are preemphasized<br />
to the ITU-T J.17 curve.<br />
The largest positive or negative sample of<br />
the32isusedtodeterminewhich10bitsofall<br />
32 samples to transmit. Three range bits per<br />
channel (R0 L ,R1 L ,R2 L ,<strong>and</strong>R0 R ,R1 R ,R2 R )are<br />
used to indicate the scaling factor. D13 is the<br />
sign bit (“0” = positive).<br />
D13–D0 R2–R0 Bits Used<br />
01xxxxxxxxxxxx 111 D13, D12–D4<br />
001xxxxxxxxxxx 110 D13, D11–D3<br />
0001xxxxxxxxxx 101 D13, D10–D2<br />
00001xxxxxxxxx 011 D13, D9–D1<br />
000001xxxxxxxx 101 D13, D8–D0<br />
0000001xxxxxxx 010 D13, D8–D0<br />
0000000xxxxxxx 00x D13, D8–D0<br />
1111111xxxxxxx 00x D13, D8–D0<br />
1111110xxxxxxx 010 D13, D8–D0<br />
111110xxxxxxxx 100 D13, D8–D0<br />
11110xxxxxxxxx 011 D13, D9–D1<br />
1110xxxxxxxxxx 101 D13, D10–D2<br />
110xxxxxxxxxxx 110 D13, D11–D3<br />
10xxxxxxxxxxxx 111 D13, D12–D4<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 279<br />
A parity bit for the six MSBs of each sample<br />
is added, resulting in each sample being 11<br />
bits. The 64 samples are interleaved, generating<br />
L0, R0, L1, R1, L2, R2, ... L31, R31, <strong>and</strong><br />
numbered 0–63.<br />
Theparitybitsareusedtoconveytothe<br />
decoder what scaling factor was used for each<br />
channel (“signalling-in-parity”).<br />
If R2 L = “0”, even parity for samples<br />
0, 6, 12, 18, ... 48 is used. If R2 L = “1”,<br />
odd parity is used.<br />
If R2 R = “0”, even parity for samples<br />
1, 7, 13, 19, ... 49 is used. If R2 R = “1”,<br />
odd parity is used.<br />
If R1 L = “0”, even parity for samples<br />
2, 8, 14, 20, ... 50 is used. If R1 L = “1”,<br />
odd parity is used.<br />
If R1 R = “0”, even parity for samples<br />
3, 9, 15, 21, ... 51 is used. If R1 R = “1”,<br />
odd parity is used.<br />
If R0 L = “0”, even parity for samples<br />
4, 10, 16, 22, ... 52 is used. If R0 L = “1”,<br />
odd parity is used.<br />
If R0 R = “0”, even parity for samples<br />
5, 11, 17, 23, ... 53 is used. If R0 R = “1”,<br />
odd parity is used.<br />
Theparityofsamples54–63 normally have<br />
even parity. However, they may be modified to<br />
transmit two additional bits of information:<br />
If CIB0 = “0”, even parity for samples<br />
54, 55, 56, 57, <strong>and</strong> 58 is used. If CIB0 =<br />
“1”, oddparityisused.<br />
If CIB1 = “0”, even parity for samples<br />
59, 60, 61, 62, <strong>and</strong> 63 is used. If CIB1 =<br />
“1”, oddparityisused.
280 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
The audio data is bit-interleaved as shown<br />
in Figure 8.22 to reduce the influence of dropouts.<br />
If the bits are numbered 0–703, they are<br />
transmitted in the order 0, 44, 88, ... 660, 1, 45,<br />
89, ... 661, 2, 46, 90, ... 703.<br />
The whole frame, except the frame alignment<br />
word, is exclusive-ORed with a 1-bit<br />
pseudo-r<strong>and</strong>om binary sequence (PRBS). The<br />
PRBS generator is reinitialized after the frame<br />
alignment word of each frame so that the first<br />
bit of the sequence processes the C0 bit. The<br />
polynomial of the PRBS is x 9 +x 4 +1withan<br />
initialization word of “111111111”.<br />
Actual transmission consists of taking bits<br />
in pairs from the 728 kbps bitstream, then generating<br />
356k symbols per second using Differential<br />
Quadrature Phase-Shift Keying<br />
(DQPSK). If the symbol is “00”, thesubcarrier<br />
phase is left unchanged. If the symbol is “01”,<br />
the subcarrier phase is delayed 90°. Ifthesymbol<br />
is “11”, the subcarrier phase is inverted. If<br />
the symbol is “10”, the subcarrier phase is<br />
advanced 90°.<br />
Finally, the signal is spectrum-shaped to a<br />
–30 dB b<strong>and</strong>width of ~700 kHz for (I) <strong>PAL</strong> or<br />
~500 kHz for (B, G) <strong>PAL</strong>.<br />
FRAME<br />
ALIGNMENT<br />
WORD<br />
CONTROL<br />
BITS ADDITIONAL DATA BITS<br />
Stereo Audio Decoding<br />
A PLL locks to the NICAM subcarrier frequency<br />
<strong>and</strong> recovers the phase changes that<br />
represent the encoded symbols. The symbols<br />
are decoded to generate the 728 kbps bitstream.<br />
The frame alignment word is found <strong>and</strong><br />
the following bits are exclusive-ORed with a<br />
locally-generated PRBS to recover the packet.<br />
The C0 bit is tested for 8 frames high, 8 frames<br />
low behavior to verify it is a NICAM 728 bitstream.<br />
The bit-interleaving of the audio data is<br />
reversed, <strong>and</strong> the “signalling-in-parity”<br />
decoded:<br />
A majority vote is taken on the parity<br />
ofsamples0,6,12,...48.Ifeven,R2 L =<br />
“0”; ifodd,R2 L = “1”.<br />
A majority vote is taken on the parity<br />
of samples 1, 7, 13, ... 49. If even, R2 R =<br />
“0”; ifodd,R2 R = “1”.<br />
A majority vote is taken on the parity<br />
ofsamples2,8,14,...50.Ifeven,R1 L =<br />
“0”; ifodd,R1 L = “1”.<br />
704 BITS<br />
AUDIO DATA<br />
0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 1, 0, C0, C1, C2, C3, C4, AD0, AD1, AD2, AD3, AD4, AD5, AD6, AD7, AD8, AD9, AD10, A000, A044, A088, ... A660,<br />
A001, A045, A089, ... A661,<br />
A002, A046, A090, ... A662,<br />
A003, A047, A091, ... A663,<br />
:<br />
A043, A087, A131, ... A703<br />
Figure 8.22. NICAM 728 Bitstream for One Frame.
Amajorityvoteistakenontheparity<br />
of samples 3, 9, 15, ... 51. If even, R1 R =<br />
“0”; if odd, R1 R = “1”.<br />
Amajorityvoteistakenontheparity<br />
of samples 4, 10, 16, ... 52. If even, R0 L =<br />
“0”; if odd, R0 L = “1”.<br />
Amajorityvoteistakenontheparity<br />
of samples 5, 11, 17, ... 53. If even, R0 R =<br />
“0”; if odd, R0 R = “1”.<br />
Amajorityvoteistakenontheparity<br />
of samples 54, 55, 56, 57, <strong>and</strong> 58. If even,<br />
CIB0 = “0”; if odd, CIB0 = “1”.<br />
Amajorityvoteistakenontheparity<br />
of samples 59, 60, 61, 62, <strong>and</strong> 63. If even,<br />
CIB1 = “0”; if odd, CIB1 = “1”.<br />
Anysampleswhoseparitydisagreedwith<br />
the vote are ignored <strong>and</strong> replaced with an<br />
interpolated value.<br />
The left channel uses range bits R2 L ,R1 L ,<br />
<strong>and</strong> R0 L to determine which bits below the<br />
sign bit were discarded during encoding. The<br />
sign bit is duplicated into those positions to<br />
generate a 14-bit sample.<br />
The right channel is similarly processed,<br />
using range bits R2 R ,R1 R ,<strong>and</strong>R0 R .Bothchannels<br />
are then de-emphasized using the J.17<br />
curve.<br />
Dual Mono Audio Encoding<br />
Two blocks of thirty-two 14-bit samples (2 ms<br />
of audio, 2’s complement format) are preemphasized<br />
to the ITU-T J.17 specification. As<br />
with the stereo audio, three range bits per<br />
block (R0 A ,R1 A ,R2 A ,<strong>and</strong>R0 B ,R1 B ,R2 B )are<br />
used to indicate the scaling factor. Unlike stereo<br />
audio, the samples are not interleaved.<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 281<br />
If R2 A = “0”, even parity for samples<br />
0, 3, 6, 9, ... 24 is used. If R2 A = “1”, odd<br />
parity is used.<br />
If R2 B = “0”, even parity for samples<br />
27, 30, 33, ... 51 is used. If R2 B = “1”, odd<br />
parity is used.<br />
If R1 A = “0”, even parity for samples<br />
1, 4, 7, 10, ... 25 is used. If R1 A = “1”, odd<br />
parity is used.<br />
If R1 B = “0”, even parity for samples<br />
28, 31, 34, ... 52 is used. If R1 B = “1”, odd<br />
parity is used.<br />
If R0 A = “0”, even parity for samples<br />
2, 5, 8, 11, ... 26 is used. If R0 A = “1”, odd<br />
parity is used.<br />
If R0 B = “0”, even parity for samples<br />
29, 32, 35, ... 53 is used. If R0 B = “1”, odd<br />
parity is used.<br />
The audio data is bit-interleaved, however,<br />
odd packets contain 64 samples of audio channel<br />
1 while even packets contain 64 samples of<br />
audio channel 2. The rest of the processing is<br />
thesameasforstereoaudio.<br />
Analog Channel Assignments<br />
Tables 8.5 through 8.7 list the channel assignments<br />
for VHF, UHF, <strong>and</strong> cable for various <strong>PAL</strong><br />
systems.<br />
Note that cable systems routinely reassign<br />
channel numbers to alternate frequencies to<br />
minimize interference <strong>and</strong> provide multiple<br />
levels of programming (such as two versions of<br />
a premium movie channel: one for subscribers,<br />
<strong>and</strong> one for nonsubscribers during pre-view<br />
times).
282 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Channel<br />
0<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
5A<br />
6<br />
7<br />
8<br />
9<br />
10<br />
11<br />
12<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
7<br />
8<br />
9<br />
Video<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Audio<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Channel<br />
Range<br />
(MHz)<br />
Channel<br />
Video<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Audio<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
(B) <strong>PAL</strong>, Australia, 7 MHz Channel (B) <strong>PAL</strong>, Italy, 7 MHz Channel<br />
46.25<br />
57.25<br />
64.25<br />
86.25<br />
95.25<br />
102.25<br />
138.25<br />
175.25<br />
182.25<br />
189.25<br />
196.25<br />
209.25<br />
216.25<br />
223.25<br />
51.75<br />
62.75<br />
69.75<br />
91.75<br />
100.75<br />
107.75<br />
143.75<br />
180.75<br />
187.75<br />
194.75<br />
201.75<br />
214.75<br />
221.75<br />
45–52<br />
56–63<br />
63–70<br />
85–92<br />
94–101<br />
101–108<br />
137–144<br />
174–181<br />
181–188<br />
188–195<br />
195–202<br />
208–215<br />
215–222<br />
Channel<br />
Range<br />
(MHz)<br />
Table 8.5. Analog Broadcast <strong>and</strong> Cable TV Nominal Frequencies for (B, I) <strong>PAL</strong> in Various Countries.<br />
A<br />
B<br />
C<br />
D<br />
E<br />
F<br />
G<br />
H<br />
H–1<br />
H–2<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
53.75<br />
62.25<br />
82.25<br />
175.25<br />
183.75<br />
192.25<br />
201.25<br />
210.25<br />
217.25<br />
224.25<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
59.25<br />
67.75<br />
87.75<br />
180.75<br />
189.25<br />
197.75<br />
206.75<br />
215.75<br />
222.75<br />
229.75<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
(I) <strong>PAL</strong>, Irel<strong>and</strong>, 8 MHz Channel (B) <strong>PAL</strong>, New Zeal<strong>and</strong>, 7 MHz Channel<br />
45.75<br />
53.75<br />
61.75<br />
175.25<br />
183.25<br />
191.25<br />
199.25<br />
207.25<br />
215.25<br />
51.75<br />
59.75<br />
67.75<br />
181.25<br />
189.25<br />
197.25<br />
205.25<br />
213.25<br />
221.25<br />
44.5–52.5<br />
52.5–60.5<br />
60.5–68.5<br />
174–182<br />
182–190<br />
190–198<br />
198–206<br />
206–214<br />
214–222<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
7<br />
8<br />
9<br />
45.25<br />
55.25<br />
62.25<br />
175.25<br />
182.25<br />
189.25<br />
196.25<br />
203.25<br />
210.25<br />
50.75<br />
60.75<br />
67.75<br />
180.75<br />
187.75<br />
194.75<br />
201.75<br />
208.75<br />
215.75<br />
52.5–59.5<br />
61–68<br />
81–88<br />
174–181<br />
182.5–189.5<br />
191–198<br />
200–207<br />
209–216<br />
216–223<br />
223–230<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
44–51<br />
54–61<br />
61–68<br />
174–181<br />
181–188<br />
188–195<br />
195–202<br />
202–209<br />
209–216
Broadcast<br />
Channel<br />
2 1<br />
3 1<br />
4 1<br />
5 1<br />
6 1<br />
7 1<br />
8 1<br />
9 1<br />
10 1<br />
2 2<br />
3 2<br />
4 2<br />
5 2<br />
6 2<br />
7 2<br />
8 2<br />
9 2<br />
10 2<br />
11 2<br />
12 2<br />
21<br />
22<br />
23<br />
24<br />
25<br />
26<br />
27<br />
28<br />
29<br />
30<br />
31<br />
32<br />
33<br />
34<br />
35<br />
36<br />
37<br />
38<br />
39<br />
Video<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
45.75<br />
53.75<br />
61.75<br />
175.25<br />
183.25<br />
191.25<br />
199.25<br />
207.25<br />
215.25<br />
48.25<br />
55.25<br />
62.25<br />
175.25<br />
182.25<br />
189.25<br />
196.25<br />
203.25<br />
210.25<br />
217.25<br />
224.25<br />
471.25<br />
479.25<br />
487.25<br />
495.25<br />
503.25<br />
511.25<br />
519.25<br />
527.25<br />
535.25<br />
543.25<br />
551.25<br />
559.25<br />
567.25<br />
575.25<br />
583.25<br />
591.25<br />
599.25<br />
607.25<br />
615.25<br />
Audio<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
(G,H)<strong>PAL</strong> (I)<strong>PAL</strong><br />
51.25<br />
59.25<br />
67.25<br />
180.75<br />
188.75<br />
196.75<br />
204.75<br />
212.75<br />
220.75<br />
53.75<br />
60.75<br />
67.75<br />
180.75<br />
187.75<br />
194.75<br />
201.75<br />
208.75<br />
215.75<br />
222.75<br />
229.75<br />
476.75<br />
484.75<br />
492.75<br />
500.75<br />
508.75<br />
516.75<br />
524.75<br />
532.75<br />
540.75<br />
548.75<br />
556.75<br />
564.75<br />
572.75<br />
580.75<br />
588.75<br />
596.75<br />
604.75<br />
612.75<br />
620.75<br />
51.75<br />
59.75<br />
67.75<br />
181.25<br />
189.25<br />
197.25<br />
205.25<br />
213.25<br />
221.25<br />
Channel<br />
Range<br />
(MHz)<br />
44.5–52.5<br />
52.5–60.5<br />
60.5–68.5<br />
174–182<br />
182–190<br />
190–198<br />
198–206<br />
206–214<br />
214–222<br />
Table 8.6a. Analog Broadcast Nominal Frequencies for the<br />
1 United Kingdom, 1 Irel<strong>and</strong>, 1 South Africa, 1 Hong Kong, <strong>and</strong><br />
2 Western Europe.<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
477.25<br />
485.25<br />
493.25<br />
501.25<br />
509.25<br />
517.25<br />
525.25<br />
533.25<br />
541.25<br />
549.25<br />
557.25<br />
565.25<br />
573.25<br />
581.25<br />
589.25<br />
597.25<br />
605.25<br />
613.25<br />
621.25<br />
47–54<br />
54–61<br />
61–68<br />
174–181<br />
181–188<br />
188–195<br />
195–202<br />
202–209<br />
209–216<br />
216–223<br />
223–230<br />
470–478<br />
478–486<br />
486–494<br />
494–502<br />
502–510<br />
510–518<br />
518–526<br />
526–534<br />
534–542<br />
542–550<br />
550–558<br />
558–566<br />
566–574<br />
574–582<br />
582–590<br />
590–598<br />
598–606<br />
606–614<br />
614–622<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 283
284 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Broadcast<br />
Channel<br />
40<br />
41<br />
42<br />
43<br />
44<br />
45<br />
46<br />
47<br />
48<br />
49<br />
50<br />
51<br />
52<br />
53<br />
54<br />
55<br />
56<br />
57<br />
58<br />
59<br />
60<br />
61<br />
62<br />
63<br />
64<br />
65<br />
66<br />
67<br />
68<br />
69<br />
Video<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
623.25<br />
631.25<br />
639.25<br />
647.25<br />
655.25<br />
663.25<br />
671.25<br />
679.25<br />
687.25<br />
695.25<br />
703.25<br />
711.25<br />
719.25<br />
727.25<br />
735.25<br />
743.25<br />
751.25<br />
759.25<br />
767.25<br />
775.25<br />
783.25<br />
791.25<br />
799.25<br />
807.25<br />
815.25<br />
823.25<br />
831.25<br />
839.25<br />
847.25<br />
855.25<br />
Audio<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
(G,H)<strong>PAL</strong> (I)<strong>PAL</strong><br />
628.75<br />
636.75<br />
644.75<br />
652.75<br />
660.75<br />
668.75<br />
676.75<br />
684.75<br />
692.75<br />
700.75<br />
708.75<br />
716.75<br />
724.75<br />
732.75<br />
740.75<br />
748.75<br />
756.75<br />
764.75<br />
772.75<br />
780.75<br />
788.75<br />
796.75<br />
804.75<br />
812.75<br />
820.75<br />
828.75<br />
836.75<br />
844.75<br />
852.75<br />
860.75<br />
629.25<br />
637.25<br />
645.25<br />
653.25<br />
661.25<br />
669.25<br />
677.25<br />
685.25<br />
693.25<br />
701.25<br />
709.25<br />
717.25<br />
725.25<br />
733.25<br />
741.25<br />
749.25<br />
757.25<br />
765.25<br />
773.25<br />
781.25<br />
789.25<br />
797.25<br />
805.25<br />
813.25<br />
821.25<br />
829.25<br />
837.25<br />
845.25<br />
853.25<br />
861.25<br />
Channel<br />
Range<br />
(MHz)<br />
622–630<br />
630–638<br />
638–646<br />
646–654<br />
654–662<br />
662–670<br />
670–678<br />
678–686<br />
686–694<br />
694–702<br />
702–710<br />
710–718<br />
718–726<br />
726–734<br />
734–742<br />
742–750<br />
750–758<br />
758–766<br />
766–774<br />
774–782<br />
782–790<br />
790–798<br />
798–806<br />
806–814<br />
814–822<br />
822–830<br />
830–838<br />
838–846<br />
846–854<br />
854–862<br />
Table 8.6b. Analog Broadcast Nominal Frequencies for the<br />
United Kingdom, Irel<strong>and</strong>, South Africa, Hong Kong, <strong>and</strong><br />
Western Europe.
<strong>PAL</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 285<br />
Table 8.7. Analog Cable TV Nominal Frequencies for the United Kingdom, Irel<strong>and</strong>, South Africa,<br />
Hong Kong, <strong>and</strong> Western Europe.<br />
Cable<br />
Channel<br />
Video<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Audio<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Channel<br />
Range<br />
(MHz)<br />
Cable<br />
Channel<br />
Video<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Audio<br />
Carrier<br />
(MHz)<br />
Channel<br />
Range<br />
(MHz)<br />
E2<br />
E3<br />
E4<br />
S01<br />
S02<br />
S03<br />
S1<br />
S2<br />
S3<br />
48.25<br />
55.25<br />
62.25<br />
69.25<br />
76.25<br />
83.25<br />
105.25<br />
112.25<br />
119.25<br />
53.75<br />
60.75<br />
67.75<br />
74.75<br />
81.75<br />
88.75<br />
110.75<br />
117.75<br />
124.75<br />
47–54<br />
54–61<br />
61–68<br />
68–75<br />
75–82<br />
82–89<br />
104–111<br />
111–118<br />
118–125<br />
S11<br />
S12<br />
S13<br />
S14<br />
S15<br />
S16<br />
S17<br />
S18<br />
S19<br />
231.25<br />
238.25<br />
245.25<br />
252.25<br />
259.25<br />
266.25<br />
273.25<br />
280.25<br />
287.25<br />
236.75<br />
243.75<br />
250.75<br />
257.75<br />
264.75<br />
271.75<br />
278.75<br />
285.75<br />
292.75<br />
230–237<br />
237–244<br />
244–251<br />
251–258<br />
258–265<br />
265–272<br />
272–279<br />
279–286<br />
286–293<br />
S4<br />
S5<br />
S6<br />
S7<br />
S8<br />
S9<br />
S10<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
126.25<br />
133.25<br />
140.75<br />
147.75<br />
154.75<br />
161.25<br />
168.25<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
131.75<br />
138.75<br />
145.75<br />
152.75<br />
159.75<br />
166.75<br />
173.75<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
125–132<br />
132–139<br />
139–146<br />
146–153<br />
153–160<br />
160–167<br />
167–174<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
S20<br />
S21<br />
S22<br />
S23<br />
S24<br />
S25<br />
S26<br />
S27<br />
S28<br />
S29<br />
294.25<br />
303.25<br />
311.25<br />
319.25<br />
327.25<br />
335.25<br />
343.25<br />
351.25<br />
359.25<br />
367.25<br />
299.75<br />
308.75<br />
316.75<br />
324.75<br />
332.75<br />
340.75<br />
348.75<br />
356.75<br />
364.75<br />
372.75<br />
293–300<br />
302–310<br />
310–318<br />
318–326<br />
326–334<br />
334–342<br />
342–350<br />
350–358<br />
358–366<br />
366–374<br />
E5<br />
E6<br />
E7<br />
E8<br />
E9<br />
E10<br />
E11<br />
E12<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
175.25<br />
182.25<br />
189.25<br />
196.25<br />
203.25<br />
210.25<br />
217.25<br />
224.25<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
180.75<br />
187.75<br />
194.75<br />
201.75<br />
208.75<br />
215.75<br />
222.75<br />
229.75<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
174–181<br />
181–188<br />
188–195<br />
195–202<br />
202–209<br />
209–216<br />
216–223<br />
223–230<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
–<br />
S30<br />
S31<br />
S32<br />
S33<br />
S34<br />
S35<br />
S36<br />
S37<br />
S38<br />
S39<br />
S40<br />
S41<br />
375.25<br />
383.25<br />
391.25<br />
399.25<br />
407.25<br />
415.25<br />
423.25<br />
431.25<br />
439.25<br />
447.25<br />
455.25<br />
463.25<br />
380.75<br />
388.75<br />
396.75<br />
404.75<br />
412.75<br />
420.75<br />
428.75<br />
436.75<br />
444.75<br />
452.75<br />
460.75<br />
468.75<br />
374–382<br />
382–390<br />
390–398<br />
398–406<br />
406–414<br />
414–422<br />
422–430<br />
430–438<br />
438–446<br />
446–454<br />
454–462<br />
462–470
286 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Use by Country<br />
Figure 8.19 shows the common designations<br />
for <strong>PAL</strong> systems. The letters refer to the monochrome<br />
st<strong>and</strong>ard for line <strong>and</strong> field rate, video<br />
b<strong>and</strong>width (4.2, 5.0, 5.5, or 6.0 MHz), audio<br />
carrier relative frequency, <strong>and</strong> RF channel<br />
b<strong>and</strong>width (6.0, 7.0, or 8.0 MHz). The “<strong>PAL</strong>”<br />
refers to the technique to add color information<br />
to the monochrome signal. Detailed timing<br />
parameters may be found in Table 8.9.<br />
The following countries use the (I) <strong>PAL</strong><br />
st<strong>and</strong>ard.<br />
Angola Malawi<br />
Botswana Namibia<br />
Gambia Nigeria<br />
Guinea-Bissau South Africa<br />
Hong Kong Tanzania<br />
Irel<strong>and</strong> United Kingdom<br />
Lesotho Zanzibar<br />
Macau<br />
The following countries use the (B) <strong>and</strong><br />
(G) <strong>PAL</strong> st<strong>and</strong>ards.<br />
Albania Kenya<br />
Algeria Kuwait<br />
Austria Liberia<br />
Bahrain Libya<br />
Cambodia Lithuania<br />
Cameroon Luxembourg<br />
Croatia Malaysia<br />
Cyprus Netherl<strong>and</strong>s<br />
Denmark New Zeal<strong>and</strong><br />
Egypt Norway<br />
Equatorial Guinea Oman<br />
Ethiopia Pakistan<br />
Finl<strong>and</strong> Papua New Guinea<br />
Germany Portugal<br />
Icel<strong>and</strong> Qatar<br />
Israel Sierra Leone<br />
Italy Singapore<br />
Jordan Slovenia<br />
Somalia Syria<br />
Spain Thail<strong>and</strong><br />
Sri Lanka Turkey<br />
Sudan Yemen<br />
Sweden Yugoslavia<br />
Switzerl<strong>and</strong><br />
The following countries use the (N) <strong>PAL</strong><br />
st<strong>and</strong>ard. Note that Argentina uses a modified<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> st<strong>and</strong>ard, called “N C .”<br />
Argentina Paraguay<br />
Aryenuna Uruguay<br />
The following countries use the (M) <strong>PAL</strong><br />
st<strong>and</strong>ard.<br />
Brazil<br />
The following countries use the (B) <strong>PAL</strong><br />
st<strong>and</strong>ard.<br />
Australia Maldives<br />
Bangladesh Malta<br />
Belgium Nigeria<br />
Brunei Darussalam Rw<strong>and</strong>ese Republic<br />
Ghana Sao Tome & Principe<br />
India Seychelles<br />
Indonesia Vanuatu<br />
The following countries use the (G) <strong>PAL</strong><br />
st<strong>and</strong>ard.<br />
Hungary Zambia<br />
Mozambique Zimbabwe<br />
Romania<br />
The following countries use the (D) <strong>PAL</strong><br />
st<strong>and</strong>ard.<br />
China Latvia<br />
Czech Republic Pol<strong>and</strong><br />
Hungary Romania<br />
Korea, North
The following countries use the (H) <strong>PAL</strong><br />
st<strong>and</strong>ard.<br />
Belgium<br />
Luma Equation Derivation<br />
The equation for generating luminance from<br />
RGB information is determined by the chromaticities<br />
of the three primary colors used by the<br />
receiver <strong>and</strong> what color white actually is.<br />
The chromaticities of the RGB primaries<br />
<strong>and</strong> reference white (CIE illuminate D65 )are:<br />
R: xr = 0.64 yr = 0.33 zr = 0.03<br />
G: xg =0.29yg = 0.60 zg =0.11<br />
B: xb =0.15yb = 0.06 zb =0.79<br />
white: xw = 0.3127<br />
zw = 0.3583<br />
yw = 0.3290<br />
where x <strong>and</strong> y are the specified CIE 1931 chromaticity<br />
coordinates; z is calculated by knowingthatx+y+z=1.<br />
As with <strong>NTSC</strong>, substituting the known values<br />
gives us the solution for K r ,K g ,<strong>and</strong>K b :<br />
Y is defined to be<br />
or<br />
Kr Kg Kb =<br />
=<br />
0.3127 ⁄ 0.3290<br />
1<br />
0.3583 ⁄ 0.3290<br />
0.674<br />
1.177<br />
1.190<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 287<br />
0.64 0.29 0.15<br />
0.33 0.60 0.06<br />
0.03 0.11 0.79<br />
Y=(K r y r )R´ +(K g y g )G´ +(K b y b )B´<br />
= (0.674)(0.33)R´ + (1.177)(0.60)G´<br />
+ (1.190)(0.06)B´<br />
Y = 0.222R´ + 0.706G´ +0.071B´<br />
However, the st<strong>and</strong>ard Y = 0.299R´ +<br />
0.587G´ + 0.114B´ equation is still used. Adjustments<br />
are made in the receiver to minimize<br />
color errors.<br />
– 1
288 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
<strong>PAL</strong>plus<br />
<strong>PAL</strong>plus (ITU-R BT.1197 <strong>and</strong> ETSI ETS<br />
300731) is the result of a cooperative project<br />
started in 1990, undertaken by several European<br />
broadcasters. By 1995, they wanted to<br />
provide an enhanced definition television system<br />
(EDTV), compatible with existing receivers.<br />
<strong>PAL</strong>plus has been transmitted by a few<br />
broadcasters since 1994.<br />
A <strong>PAL</strong>plus picture has a 16:9 aspect ratio.<br />
On conventional TVs, it is displayed as a 16:9<br />
letterboxed image with 430 active lines. On<br />
<strong>PAL</strong>plus TVs, it is displayed as a 16:9 picture<br />
with 574 active lines, with extended vertical<br />
resolution. The full video b<strong>and</strong>width is available<br />
for luminance detail. Cross color artifacts<br />
are reduced by clean encoding.<br />
Wide Screen Signalling<br />
Line 23 is contains a Widescreen Signalling<br />
(WSS) control signal, defined by ITU-R<br />
BT.1119 <strong>and</strong> ETSI EN 300294, used by <strong>PAL</strong>plus<br />
TVs. This signal indicates:<br />
Program Aspect Ratio:<br />
Full Format 4:3<br />
Letterbox 14:9 Center<br />
Letterbox 14:9 Top<br />
Full Format 14:9 Center<br />
Letterbox 16:9 Center<br />
Letterbox 16:9 Top<br />
Full Format 16:9 Anamorphic<br />
Letterbox > 16:9 Center<br />
Enhanced services:<br />
Camera Mode<br />
Film Mode<br />
Subtitles:<br />
Teletext Subtitles Present<br />
Open Subtitles Present<br />
<strong>PAL</strong>plus is defined as being Letterbox 16:9<br />
center, camera mode or film mode, helper signals<br />
present using modulation, <strong>and</strong> clean<br />
encoding used. Teletext subtitles may or may<br />
not be present, <strong>and</strong> open subtitles may be<br />
present only in the active picture area.<br />
During a <strong>PAL</strong>plus transmission, any active<br />
video on lines 23 <strong>and</strong> 623 is blanked prior to<br />
encoding. In addition to WSS data, line 23<br />
includes 48 ±1 cycles of a 300 ±9 mV subcarrier<br />
with a –U phase,starting51µs ±250 ns<br />
after 0 H. Line 623 contains a 10 µs ±250 ns<br />
white pulse, starting 20 µs ±250 ns after 0 H .<br />
A <strong>PAL</strong>plus TV has the option of deinterlacing<br />
a Film Mode signal <strong>and</strong> displaying it on a<br />
50-Hz progressive-scan display or using field<br />
repeating on a 100-Hz interlaced display.<br />
Ghost Cancellation<br />
An optional ghost cancellation signal on line<br />
318, defined by ITU-R BT.1124 <strong>and</strong> ETSI ETS<br />
300732, allows a suitably adapted TV to measure<br />
the ghost signal <strong>and</strong> cancel any ghosting<br />
during the active video. A <strong>PAL</strong>plus TV may or<br />
may not support this feature.<br />
Vertical Filtering<br />
All <strong>PAL</strong>plus sources start out as a 16:9 YCbCr<br />
anamorphic image, occupying all 576 active<br />
scan lines. Any active video on lines 23 <strong>and</strong> 623<br />
is blanked prior to encoding (since these lines<br />
are used for WSS <strong>and</strong> reference information),<br />
resulting in 574 active lines per frame. Lines<br />
24–310 <strong>and</strong> 336–622areusedforactivevideo.<br />
Before transmission, the 574 active scan<br />
lines of the 16:9 image are squeezed into 430<br />
scan lines. To avoid aliasing problems, the vertical<br />
resolution is reduced by lowpass filtering.<br />
For Y, vertical filtering is done using a<br />
Quadrature Mirror Filter (QMF) highpass <strong>and</strong><br />
lowpass pair. Using the QMF process allows<br />
the highpass <strong>and</strong> lowpass information to be
esampled, transmitted, <strong>and</strong> later recombined<br />
with minimal loss.<br />
The Y QMF lowpass output is resampled<br />
into three-quarters of the original height; little<br />
information is lost to aliasing. After clean<br />
encoding, it is the letterboxed signal that conventional<br />
4:3 TVs display.<br />
The Y QMF highpass output contains the<br />
rest of the original vertical frequency. It is<br />
used to generate the helper signals that are<br />
transmitted using the “black” scan lines not<br />
used by the letterbox picture.<br />
Film Mode<br />
A film mode broadcast has both fields of a<br />
frame coming from the same image, as is usually<br />
the case with a movie scanned on a telecine.<br />
In film mode, the maximum vertical resolution<br />
per frame is about 287 cycles per active<br />
picture height (cph), limited by the 574 active<br />
scan lines per frame.<br />
The vertical resolution of Y is reduced to<br />
215 cph so it can be transmitted using only 430<br />
active lines. The QMF lowpass <strong>and</strong> highpass<br />
filters split the Y vertical information into DC–<br />
215 cph <strong>and</strong> 216–287 cph.<br />
The Y lowpass information is re-scanned<br />
into 430 lines to become the letterbox image.<br />
Since the vertical frequency is limited to a<br />
maximum of 215 cph, no information is lost.<br />
The Y highpass output is decimated so<br />
only one in four lines are transmitted. These<br />
144 lines are used to transmit the helper signals.<br />
Because of the QMF process, no information<br />
is lost to decimation.<br />
The72linesabove<strong>and</strong>72linesbelowthe<br />
central 430-line of the letterbox image are used<br />
to transmit the 144 lines of the helper signal.<br />
This results in a st<strong>and</strong>ard 574 active line picture,<br />
but with the original image in its correct<br />
aspect ratio, centered between the helper signals.<br />
The scan lines containing the 300 mV<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 289<br />
helper signals are modulated using the U subcarrier<br />
so they look black <strong>and</strong> are not visible to<br />
the viewer.<br />
After Fixed ColorPlus processing, the 574<br />
scan lines are <strong>PAL</strong> encoded <strong>and</strong> transmitted as<br />
a st<strong>and</strong>ard interlaced <strong>PAL</strong> frame.<br />
Camera Mode<br />
Camera (or video) mode assumes the fields of<br />
a frame are independent of each other, as<br />
would be the case when a camera scans a<br />
scene in motion. Therefore, the image may<br />
have changed between fields. Only intra-field<br />
processing is done.<br />
In camera mode, the maximum vertical<br />
resolution per field is about 143 cycles per<br />
active picture height (cph), limited by the 287<br />
active scan lines per field.<br />
The vertical resolution of Y is reduced to<br />
107 cph so it can be transmitted using only 215<br />
active lines. The QMF lowpass <strong>and</strong> highpass<br />
filter pair split the Y vertical information into<br />
DC–107 cph <strong>and</strong> 108–143 cph.<br />
The Y lowpass information is re-scanned<br />
into 215 lines to become the letterbox image.<br />
Since the vertical frequency is limited to a<br />
maximum of 107 cph, no information is lost.<br />
The Y highpass output is decimated so<br />
only one in four lines is transmitted. These 72<br />
lines are used to transmit the helper signals.<br />
Because of the QMF process, no information is<br />
lost to decimation.<br />
The36linesabove<strong>and</strong>36linesbelowthe<br />
central 215-line of the letterbox image are used<br />
totransmitthe72linesofthehelpersignal.<br />
This results in a 287 active line picture, but<br />
with the original image in its correct aspect<br />
ratio, centered between the helper signals. The<br />
scan lines containing the 300 mV helper signals<br />
are modulated using the U subcarrier so<br />
they look black <strong>and</strong> are not visible to the<br />
viewer.
290 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
AftereitherFixedorMotionAdaptiveColorPlus<br />
processing, the 287 scan lines are <strong>PAL</strong><br />
encoded <strong>and</strong> transmitted as a st<strong>and</strong>ard <strong>PAL</strong><br />
field.<br />
Clean Encoding<br />
Only the letterboxed portion of the <strong>PAL</strong>plus<br />
signal is clean encoded. The helper signals are<br />
not actual <strong>PAL</strong> video. However, they are close<br />
enough to video to pass through the transmission<br />
path <strong>and</strong> remain fairly invisible on st<strong>and</strong>ard<br />
TVs.<br />
ColorPlus Processing<br />
Fixed ColorPlus<br />
Film Mode uses a Fixed ColorPlus technique,<br />
making use of the lack of motion between the<br />
two fields of the frame.<br />
Fixed ColorPlus depends on the subcarrier<br />
phase of the composite <strong>PAL</strong> signal being of<br />
opposite phase when 312 lines apart. If these<br />
two lines have the same luminance <strong>and</strong><br />
chrominance information, it can be separated<br />
by adding <strong>and</strong> subtracting the composite signals<br />
from each other. Adding cancels the<br />
chrominance, leaving luminance. Subtracting<br />
cancels the luminance, leaving chrominance.<br />
In practice, Y information above 3 MHz<br />
(Y HF ) is intra-frame averaged since it shares<br />
the frequency spectrum with the modulated<br />
chrominance. For line [n], Y HF is calculated as<br />
follows:<br />
0 ≤ n ≤ 214 for 430-line letterboxed image<br />
YHF(60 + n) = 0.5(YHF(372 + n) +YHF(60 + n) )<br />
Y HF(372 + n) =Y HF(60 + n)<br />
Y HF is then added to the low-frequency Y<br />
(Y LF ) information. The same intra-frame averaging<br />
process is also used for Cb <strong>and</strong> Cr. The<br />
430-line letterbox image is then <strong>PAL</strong> encoded.<br />
Thus, Y information above 3 MHz, <strong>and</strong><br />
CbCr information, is the same on lines [n] <strong>and</strong><br />
[n+312]. Y information below 3 MHz may be<br />
different on lines [n] <strong>and</strong> [n+312]. The full vertical<br />
resolution of 287 cph is reconstructed by<br />
the decoder with the aid of the helper signals.<br />
Motion Adaptive ColorPlus (MACP)<br />
Camera Mode uses either Motion Adaptive<br />
ColorPlus or Fixed ColorPlus, depending on<br />
the amount of motion between fields. This<br />
requires a motion detector in both the encoder<br />
<strong>and</strong> decoder.<br />
To detect movement, the CbCr data on<br />
lines [n] <strong>and</strong> [n+312] are compared. If they<br />
match, no movement is assumed, <strong>and</strong> Fixed<br />
ColorPlus operation is used. If the CbCr data<br />
doesn’t match, movement is assumed, <strong>and</strong><br />
Motion Adaptive ColorPlus operation is used.<br />
During Motion Adaptive ColorPlus operation,<br />
the amount of Y HF added to Y LF is dependent<br />
on the difference between CbCr (n) <strong>and</strong><br />
CbCr (n + 312) . For the maximum CbCr difference,<br />
no Y HF data for lines [n] <strong>and</strong> [n+312] is<br />
transmitted.<br />
In addition, the amount of intra-frame averaged<br />
CbCr data mixed with the direct CbCr<br />
data is dependent on the difference between<br />
CbCr (n) <strong>and</strong> CbCr (n + 312) .Forthemaximum<br />
CbCr difference, only direct CbCr data is transmitted<br />
separately for lines [n] <strong>and</strong> [n+312].
<strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
<strong>SECAM</strong> (Sequentiel Couleur Avec Mémoire or<br />
Sequential Color with Memory) was developed<br />
in France, with broadcasting starting in 1967,<br />
by realizing that, if color could be b<strong>and</strong>widthlimited<br />
horizontally, why not also vertically?<br />
The two pieces of color information (Db <strong>and</strong><br />
Dr) added to the monochrome signal could be<br />
transmitted on alternate lines, avoiding the<br />
possibility of crosstalk.<br />
The receiver requires memory to store<br />
one line so that it is concurrent with the next<br />
line, <strong>and</strong> also requires the addition of a lineswitching<br />
identification technique.<br />
Like <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>SECAM</strong> is a 625-line, 50-fieldper-second,<br />
2:1 interlaced system. <strong>SECAM</strong> was<br />
adopted by other countries; however, many are<br />
changing to <strong>PAL</strong> due to the abundance of professional<br />
<strong>and</strong> consumer <strong>PAL</strong> equipment.<br />
Luminance Information<br />
The monochrome luminance (Y) signal is<br />
derived from R´G´B´:<br />
Y = 0.299R´ + 0.587G´ + 0.114B´<br />
As with <strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>PAL</strong>, the luminance signal<br />
occupies the entire video b<strong>and</strong>width.<br />
<strong>SECAM</strong> has several variations, depending on<br />
the video b<strong>and</strong>width <strong>and</strong> placement of the<br />
audio subcarrier. The video signal has a b<strong>and</strong>width<br />
of 5.0 or 6.0 MHz, depending on the specific<br />
<strong>SECAM</strong> st<strong>and</strong>ard.<br />
Color Information<br />
<strong>SECAM</strong> transmits Db information during one<br />
line <strong>and</strong> Dr information during the next line;<br />
luminance information is transmitted each<br />
<strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 291<br />
line. Db <strong>and</strong> Dr are scaled versions of B´ –Y<br />
<strong>and</strong> R´–Y:<br />
Dr = –1.902(R´–Y)<br />
Db = 1.505(B´ –Y)<br />
Since there is an odd number of lines, any<br />
given line contains Db information on one field<br />
<strong>and</strong> Dr information on the next field. The<br />
decoder requires a 1-H delay, switched synchronously<br />
with the Db <strong>and</strong> Dr switching, so<br />
that Db <strong>and</strong> Dr exist simultaneously in order to<br />
convert to YCbCr or RGB.<br />
Color Modulation<br />
<strong>SECAM</strong> uses FM modulation to transmit the<br />
Db <strong>and</strong> Dr color difference information, with<br />
each component having its own subcarrier.<br />
Db <strong>and</strong> Dr are lowpass filtered to 1.3 MHz<br />
<strong>and</strong>pre-emphasisisapplied.Thecurveforthe<br />
pre-emphasis is expressed by:<br />
f<br />
1 + j⎛-----<br />
⎞<br />
⎝85⎠ A =<br />
------------------------f<br />
1 + j⎛--------⎞<br />
⎝255⎠ where ƒ = signal frequency in kHz.<br />
Afterpre-emphasis,Db<strong>and</strong>Drfrequency<br />
modulate their respective subcarriers. The frequency<br />
of each subcarrier is defined as:<br />
FOB = 272 FH = 4.250000 MHz (± 2kHz)<br />
FOR = 282 FH = 4.406250 MHz (± 2kHz)<br />
These frequencies represent no color<br />
information. Nominal Dr deviation is ±280 kHz<br />
<strong>and</strong> the nominal Db deviation is ±230 kHz. Figure<br />
8.23 illustrates the frequency modulation
292 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
process of the color difference signals. The<br />
choice of frequency shifts reflects the idea of<br />
keeping the frequencies representing critical<br />
colors away from the upper limit of the spectrum<br />
to minimize distortion.<br />
After modulation of Db <strong>and</strong> Dr, subcarrier<br />
pre-emphasis is applied, changing the amplitude<br />
of the subcarrier as a function of the frequency<br />
deviation. The intention is to reduce<br />
the visibility of the subcarriers in areas of low<br />
luminance <strong>and</strong> to improve the signal-to-noise<br />
ratio of highly saturated colors. This preemphasis<br />
is given as:<br />
1 j16F<br />
G M +<br />
= -------------------------<br />
1 + j1.26F<br />
whereF=(ƒ/4286) – (4286/ƒ), ƒ = instantaneous<br />
subcarrier frequency in kHz, <strong>and</strong> 2M =<br />
23 ± 2.5% of luminance amplitude.<br />
Y<br />
EVEN LINES<br />
ODD LINES<br />
YELLOW<br />
– DB<br />
RED<br />
+ DR<br />
GRAY<br />
FOB<br />
4.25<br />
As shown in Table 8.8 <strong>and</strong> Figure 8.24, Db<br />
<strong>and</strong> Dr information is transmitted on alternate<br />
scan lines. The phase of the subcarriers is also<br />
reversed 180° on every third line <strong>and</strong> between<br />
each field to further reduce subcarrier visibility.<br />
Note that subcarrier phase information in<br />
the <strong>SECAM</strong> system carries no picture information.<br />
Composite Video Generation<br />
The subcarrier data is added to the luminance<br />
along with appropriate horizontal <strong>and</strong> vertical<br />
sync signals, blanking signals, <strong>and</strong> burst signals<br />
to generate composite video.<br />
As with <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>SECAM</strong> requires some<br />
means of identifying the line-switching<br />
sequence. Modern practice has been to use a<br />
F OR /F OB burst after most horizontal syncs to<br />
derive the switching synchronization information,<br />
as shown in Figure 8.25.<br />
GRAY<br />
FOR<br />
4.40<br />
BLUE<br />
+ DB<br />
CYAN<br />
– DR<br />
Figure 8.23. <strong>SECAM</strong> FM Color Modulation.<br />
6<br />
MHZ
Use by Country<br />
Figure8.26showsthecommondesignations<br />
for <strong>SECAM</strong> systems. The letters refer to the<br />
monochrome st<strong>and</strong>ard for line <strong>and</strong> field rates,<br />
video b<strong>and</strong>width (5.0 or 6.0 MHz), audio carrier<br />
relative frequency, <strong>and</strong> RF channel b<strong>and</strong>width.<br />
The <strong>SECAM</strong> refers to the technique to<br />
add color information to the monochrome signal.<br />
Detailed timing parameters may be found<br />
in Table 8.9.<br />
The following countries use the (B) <strong>and</strong><br />
(G) <strong>SECAM</strong> st<strong>and</strong>ards.<br />
Greece Mauritius<br />
Iran Morocco<br />
Iraq Saudi Arabia<br />
Lebanon Tunisia<br />
Mali<br />
Table 8.8. <strong>SECAM</strong> Color Versus Line <strong>and</strong> Field Timing.<br />
<strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 293<br />
Field<br />
Line<br />
Number<br />
Color Subcarrier Phase<br />
odd N Dr 0°<br />
even N + 313 Db 180°<br />
odd N + 1 Db 0°<br />
even N + 314 Dr 0°<br />
odd N + 2 Dr 180°<br />
even N + 315 Db 180°<br />
odd N + 3 Db 0°<br />
even N + 316 Dr 180°<br />
odd N + 4 Dr 0°<br />
even N + 317 Db 0°<br />
odd N + 5 Db 180°<br />
even N + 318 Dr 180°<br />
The following countries use the (D) <strong>and</strong><br />
(K) <strong>SECAM</strong> st<strong>and</strong>ards.<br />
Azerbaijan Latvia<br />
Belarus Lithuania<br />
Bulgaria Moldova<br />
Estonia Russia<br />
Georgia Ukraine<br />
Kazakhstan Viet Nam<br />
The following countries use the (B)<br />
<strong>SECAM</strong> st<strong>and</strong>ard.<br />
Mauritania Djibouti<br />
The following countries use the (D)<br />
<strong>SECAM</strong> st<strong>and</strong>ard.<br />
Afghanistan Mongolia
294 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
DR DB<br />
START<br />
OF<br />
VSYNC<br />
620 621 622 623 624 625 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 23 24<br />
DB<br />
ANALOG<br />
FIELD 1<br />
ANALOG<br />
FIELD 2<br />
308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 336 337<br />
DB DR<br />
DR DB<br />
ANALOG<br />
FIELD 3<br />
620 621 622 623 624 625 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 23 24<br />
DR<br />
DR DB<br />
DB DR<br />
DB DR<br />
ANALOG<br />
FIELD 4<br />
DR DB<br />
DB DR<br />
DB DR<br />
DR DB<br />
308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 336 337<br />
Figure 8.24. Four-field <strong>SECAM</strong> Sequence. See Figure 8.5 for equalization <strong>and</strong> serration pulse<br />
details.<br />
FO<br />
HORIZONTAL<br />
BLANKING<br />
BLANK LEVEL<br />
SYNC LEVEL<br />
Figure 8.25. <strong>SECAM</strong> Chroma Synchronization Signals.
FREQUENCY MODULATED SUBCARRIERS<br />
FOR = 282 FH<br />
FOB = 272 FH<br />
LINE SEQUENTIAL DR AND DB SIGNALS<br />
"D, K, K1, L"<br />
LINE / FIELD = 625 / 50<br />
FH = 15.625 KHZ<br />
FV = 50 HZ<br />
BLANKING SETUP = 0 IRE<br />
VIDEO BANDWIDTH = 6.0 MHZ<br />
AUDIO CARRIER = 6.5 MHZ<br />
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH = 8 MHZ<br />
The following countries use the (K1)<br />
<strong>SECAM</strong> st<strong>and</strong>ard.<br />
Benin Gabon<br />
Burkina Faso Guadeloupe<br />
Burundi Madagascar<br />
Cape Verde Niger<br />
Central African Senegal<br />
Republic Tahiti<br />
Chad Togo<br />
Comoros Zaire<br />
Congo<br />
"B, G"<br />
LINE / FIELD = 625 / 50<br />
FH = 15.625 KHZ<br />
FV = 50 HZ<br />
BLANKING SETUP = 0 IRE<br />
VIDEO BANDWIDTH = 5.0 MHZ<br />
AUDIO CARRIER = 5.5 MHZ<br />
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH:<br />
B = 7 MHZ<br />
G = 8 MHZ<br />
Figure 8.26. Common <strong>SECAM</strong> Systems.<br />
<strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 295<br />
The following countries use the (L)<br />
<strong>SECAM</strong> st<strong>and</strong>ard.<br />
France Monaco
296 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Luminance Equation Derivation<br />
The equation for generating luminance from<br />
RGB information is determined by the chromaticities<br />
of the three primary colors used by the<br />
receiver <strong>and</strong> what color white actually is.<br />
The chromaticities of the RGB primaries<br />
<strong>and</strong> reference white (CIE illuminate D 65 )are:<br />
R: xr =0.64 yr = 0.33 zr = 0.03<br />
G: xg = 0.29 yg =0.60zg =0.11<br />
B: xb = 0.15 yb =0.06zb =0.79<br />
white: xw = 0.3127<br />
zw = 0.3583<br />
yw = 0.3290<br />
where x <strong>and</strong> y are the specified CIE 1931 chromaticity<br />
coordinates; z is calculated by knowing<br />
that x + y + z = 1. Once again, substituting<br />
theknownvaluesgivesusthesolutionforK r ,<br />
K g ,<strong>and</strong>K b :<br />
Y is defined to be<br />
or<br />
Kr Kg Kb =<br />
=<br />
0.3127 ⁄ 0.3290<br />
1<br />
0.3583 ⁄ 0.3290<br />
0.674<br />
1.177<br />
1.190<br />
0.64 0.29 0.15<br />
0.33 0.60 0.06<br />
0.03 0.11 0.79<br />
Y=(K r y r )R´ +(K g y g )G´ +(K b y b )B´<br />
= (0.674)(0.33)R´ + (1.177)(0.60)G´<br />
+ (1.190)(0.06)B´<br />
Y = 0.222R´ + 0.706G´ +0.071B´<br />
However, the st<strong>and</strong>ard Y = 0.299R´ +<br />
0.587G´ + 0.114B´ equation is still used. Adjustments<br />
are made in the receiver to minimize<br />
color errors.<br />
– 1
SCAN LINES PER FRAME<br />
FIELD FREQUENCY<br />
(FIELDS / SECOND)<br />
LINE FREQUENCY (HZ)<br />
PEAK WHITE LEVEL (IRE)<br />
SYNC TIP LEVEL (IRE)<br />
SETUP (IRE)<br />
PEAK VIDEO LEVEL (IRE)<br />
GAMMA OF RECEIVER<br />
VIDEO BANDWIDTH (MHZ)<br />
LUMINANCE SIGNAL<br />
M<br />
525<br />
59.94<br />
15,734<br />
100<br />
–40<br />
7.5 ± 2.5<br />
120<br />
2.2<br />
4.2<br />
N<br />
625<br />
50<br />
15,625<br />
100<br />
–40 (–43)<br />
7.5 ± 2.5 (0)<br />
2.8<br />
5.0 (4.2)<br />
1 Values in parentheses apply to (NC) <strong>PAL</strong> used in Argentina.<br />
625<br />
50<br />
15,625<br />
100<br />
–43<br />
Y = 0.299R´ + 0.685G´ + 0.114B´ (RGB ARE GAMMA–CORRECTED)<br />
0<br />
<strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 297<br />
B, G H I D, K K1<br />
L<br />
133<br />
2.8<br />
5.0<br />
Table 8.9a. Basic Characteristics of Color Video Signals.<br />
2.8<br />
5.0<br />
133<br />
2.8<br />
5.5<br />
115<br />
2.8<br />
6.0<br />
115<br />
2.8<br />
6.0<br />
125<br />
2.8<br />
6.0
298 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Characteristics M N<br />
Notes<br />
1. 0 H is at 50% point of falling edge of horizontal sync.<br />
2. In case of different st<strong>and</strong>ards having different specifications <strong>and</strong> tolerances, the<br />
tightest specification <strong>and</strong> tolerance is listed.<br />
3. Timing is measured between half-amplitude points on appropriate signal edges.<br />
Table 8.9b. Details of Line Synchronization Signals.<br />
B, D, G, H, I<br />
K,K1,L,N C<br />
Nominal line period (µs) 63.5555 64 64<br />
Line blanking interval (µs) 10.7 ± 0.1 10.88 ± 0.64 11.85 ± 0.15<br />
0 H to start of active video (µs) 9.2 ± 0.1 9.6 ± 0.64 10.5<br />
Front porch (µs) 1.5 ± 0.1 1.92 ± 0.64 1.65 ± 0.15<br />
Line synchronizing pulse (µs) 4.7 ± 0.1 4.99 ± 0.77 4.7 ± 0.2<br />
Rise <strong>and</strong> fall time of line<br />
blanking (10%, 90%) (ns) 140 ± 20 300 ± 100 300 ± 100<br />
Rise <strong>and</strong> fall time of line<br />
synchronizing pulses (10%, 90%) (ns) 140 ± 20 ≤ 250 250 ± 50
Characteristics M N<br />
Notes<br />
1. In case of different st<strong>and</strong>ards having different specifications <strong>and</strong> tolerances, the tightest<br />
specification <strong>and</strong> tolerance is listed.<br />
2. Timing is measured between half-amplitude points on appropriate signal edges.<br />
Table 8.9c. Details of Field Synchronization Signals.<br />
<strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong> 299<br />
B, D, G, H, I<br />
K,K1,L,N C<br />
Field period (ms) 16.6833 20 20<br />
Field blanking interval 20 lines 19–25 lines 25 lines<br />
Rise <strong>and</strong> fall time of field blanking<br />
(10%, 90%) (ns)<br />
Duration of equalizing <strong>and</strong><br />
synchronizing sequences<br />
140 ± 20 ≤ 250 300 ± 100<br />
3H 3H 2.5H<br />
Equalizing pulse width (µs) 2.3 ± 0.1 2.43 ± 0.13 2.35 ± 0.1<br />
Serration pulse width (µs) 4.7 ± 0.1 4.7 ± 0.8 4.7 ± 0.1<br />
Rise <strong>and</strong> fall time of synchronizing <strong>and</strong><br />
equalizing pulses (10%, 90%) (ns)<br />
140 ± 20 < 250 250 ± 50
300 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
ATTENUATION OF COLOR<br />
DIFFERENCE SIGNALS<br />
START OF BURST<br />
AFTER 0H (µS)<br />
BURST DURATION (CYCLES)<br />
BURST PEAK AMPLITUDE<br />
Video Test Signals<br />
M / <strong>NTSC</strong><br />
U, V, I, Q:<br />
< 2 DB AT 1.3 MHZ<br />
> 20 DB AT 3.6 MHZ<br />
OR Q:<br />
< 2 DB AT 0.4 MHZ<br />
< 6 DB AT 0.5 MHZ<br />
> 6 DB AT 0.6 MHZ<br />
5.3 ± 0.07<br />
9 ± 1<br />
40 ± 1 IRE<br />
Many industry-st<strong>and</strong>ard video test signals<br />
have been defined to help test the relative quality<br />
of encoding, decoding, <strong>and</strong> the transmission<br />
path, <strong>and</strong> to perform calibration. Note that<br />
some video test signals cannot be properly<br />
generated by providing RGB data to an<br />
encoder; in this case, YCbCr data may be used.<br />
If the video st<strong>and</strong>ard uses a 7.5-IRE setup,<br />
typically only test signals used for visual examination<br />
use the 7.5-IRE setup. Test signals<br />
designed for measurement purposes typically<br />
use a 0-IRE setup, providing the advantage of<br />
defining a known blanking level.<br />
Color Bars <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Color bars are one of the st<strong>and</strong>ard video test<br />
signals, <strong>and</strong> there are several variations,<br />
depending on the video st<strong>and</strong>ard <strong>and</strong> application.<br />
For this reason, this section reviews the<br />
M / <strong>PAL</strong><br />
< 2 DB AT 1.3 MHZ<br />
> 20 DB AT 3.6 MHZ<br />
5.8 ± 0.1<br />
9 ± 1<br />
42.86 ± 4 IRE<br />
Note: Values in parentheses apply to (N C) <strong>PAL</strong>usedinArgentina.<br />
B, D, G, H, I, N / <strong>PAL</strong><br />
< 3 DB AT 1.3 MHZ<br />
> 20 DB AT 4 MHZ<br />
(> 20 DB AT 3.6 MHZ)<br />
5.6 ± 0.1<br />
10 ± 1 (9 ± 1)<br />
42.86 ± 4 IRE<br />
Table 8.9d. Basic Characteristics of Color Video Signals.<br />
B, D, G, K, K1, K / <strong>SECAM</strong><br />
< 3 DB AT 1.3 MHZ<br />
> 30 DB AT 3.5 MHZ<br />
(BEFORE LOW FREQUENCY<br />
PRE–CORRECTION)<br />
most common color bar formats. Color bars<br />
have two major characteristics: amplitude <strong>and</strong><br />
saturation.<br />
The amplitude of a color bar signal is<br />
determined by:<br />
amplitude (%)<br />
where max(R,G,B) a is the maximum value of<br />
R´G´B´ during colored bars <strong>and</strong> max(R,G,B) b<br />
is the maximum value of R´G´B´ during reference<br />
white.<br />
The saturation of a color bar signal is less<br />
than 100% if the minimum value of any one of<br />
the R´G´B´ components is not zero. The saturation<br />
is determined by:<br />
saturation (%) =<br />
=<br />
min( R, G, B)<br />
1 ⎛-------------------------------- ⎞<br />
⎝max( R, G, B)<br />
⎠<br />
γ<br />
–<br />
max (R, G, B)<br />
------------------------------------------------- a × 100<br />
max (R, G, B) b<br />
× 100
where min(R,G,B) <strong>and</strong> max(R,G,B) are the<br />
minimum <strong>and</strong> maximum values, respectively,<br />
of R´G´B´ during colored bars, <strong>and</strong> γ is the<br />
gamma exponent, typically [1/0.45].<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong> Color Bars<br />
In 1953, it was normal practice for the analog<br />
R´G´B´ signals to have a 7.5 IRE setup, <strong>and</strong> the<br />
original <strong>NTSC</strong> equations assumed this form of<br />
input to an encoder. Today, digital R´G´B´ or<br />
YCbCr signals typically do not include the 7.5<br />
IRE setup, <strong>and</strong> the 7.5 IRE setup is added<br />
within the encoder.<br />
The different color bar signals are<br />
described by four amplitudes, expressed in<br />
percent, separated by oblique strokes. 100%<br />
saturation is implied, so saturation is not specified.<br />
The first <strong>and</strong> second numbers are the<br />
white <strong>and</strong> black amplitudes, respectively. The<br />
third <strong>and</strong> fourth numbers are the white <strong>and</strong><br />
black amplitudes from which the color bars are<br />
derived.<br />
For example, 100/7.5/75/7.5 color bars<br />
would be 75% color bars with 7.5% setup in<br />
which the white bar has been set to 100% <strong>and</strong><br />
the black bar to 7.5%. Since <strong>NTSC</strong> systems usually<br />
have the 7.5% setup, the two common color<br />
bars are 75/7.5/75/7.5 <strong>and</strong> 100/7.5/100/7.5,<br />
which are usually shortened to 75% <strong>and</strong> 100%,<br />
respectively. The 75% bars are most commonly<br />
used. Television transmitters do not pass information<br />
with an amplitude greater than about<br />
120 IRE. Therefore, the 75% color bars are<br />
used for transmission testing. The 100% color<br />
bars may be used for testing in situations<br />
where a direct connection between equipment<br />
is possible. The 75/7.5/75/7.5 color bars are a<br />
part of the Electronic Industries Association<br />
EIA-189-A Encoded Color Bar St<strong>and</strong>ard.<br />
Figure 8.27 shows a typical vectorscope<br />
display for full-screen 75% <strong>NTSC</strong> color bars.<br />
Figure8.28illustratesthevideowaveformfor<br />
75% color bars.<br />
Video Test Signals 301<br />
Tables 8.10 <strong>and</strong> 8.11 list the luminance <strong>and</strong><br />
chrominance levels for the two common color<br />
barformatsfor<strong>NTSC</strong>.<br />
For reference, the RGB <strong>and</strong> YCbCr values<br />
to generate the st<strong>and</strong>ard <strong>NTSC</strong> color bars are<br />
shown in Tables 8.12 <strong>and</strong> 8.13. RGB is<br />
assumed to have a range of 0–255; YCbCr is<br />
assumed to have a range of 16–235 for Y <strong>and</strong><br />
16–240 for Cb <strong>and</strong> Cr. It is assumed any 7.5 IRE<br />
setup is implemented within the encoder.<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> Color Bars<br />
Unlike <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong> does not support a 7.5 IRE<br />
setup; the black <strong>and</strong> blank levels are the same.<br />
The different color bar signals are usually<br />
described by four amplitudes, expressed in<br />
percent, separated by oblique strokes. The<br />
first <strong>and</strong> second numbers are the maximum<br />
<strong>and</strong> minimum percentages, respectively, of<br />
R´G´B´ values for an uncolored bar. The third<br />
<strong>and</strong> fourth numbers are the maximum <strong>and</strong><br />
minimum percentages, respectively, of R´G´B´<br />
values for a colored bar.<br />
Since <strong>PAL</strong> systems have a 0% setup, the<br />
two common color bars are 100/0/75/0 <strong>and</strong><br />
100/0/100/0, which are usually shortened to<br />
75% <strong>and</strong> 100%, respectively. The 75% color bars<br />
are used for transmission testing. The 100%<br />
color bars may be used for testing in situations<br />
where a direct connection between equipment<br />
is possible.<br />
The 100/0/75/0 color bars also are<br />
referred to as EBU (European Broadcast<br />
Union) color bars. All of the color bars discussed<br />
in this section are also a part of Specification<br />
of Television St<strong>and</strong>ards for 625-line<br />
System-I Transmissions (1971) published by the<br />
Independent Television Authority (ITA) <strong>and</strong><br />
the British Broadcasting Corporation (BBC),<br />
<strong>and</strong> ITU-R BT.471.
302 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Figure 8.27. Typical Vectorscope Display for 75% <strong>NTSC</strong> Color Bars.
100 IRE<br />
40 IRE<br />
20 IRE<br />
20 IRE<br />
7.5 IRE<br />
3.58 MHZ<br />
COLOR BURST<br />
(9 CYCLES)<br />
WHITE<br />
+ 77<br />
YELLOW<br />
+ 69<br />
+ 38<br />
CYAN<br />
+ 100<br />
Figure 8.28. IRE Values for 75% <strong>NTSC</strong> Color Bars.<br />
Luminance<br />
(IRE)<br />
Chrominance<br />
Level<br />
(IRE)<br />
+ 56<br />
+ 12<br />
GREEN<br />
+ 89<br />
+ 48<br />
+ 7<br />
Minimum<br />
Chrominance<br />
Excursion<br />
(IRE)<br />
Table 8.10. 75/7.5/75/7.5 (75%) <strong>NTSC</strong> Color Bars.<br />
MAGENTA<br />
+ 77<br />
+ 36<br />
– 5<br />
RED<br />
+ 72<br />
+ 28<br />
– 16<br />
BLUE<br />
+ 46<br />
+ 15<br />
– 16<br />
BLACK<br />
Maximum<br />
Chrominance<br />
Excursion<br />
(IRE)<br />
Video Test Signals 303<br />
WHITE LEVEL (100 IRE)<br />
BLACK LEVEL (7.5 IRE)<br />
BLANK LEVEL (0 IRE)<br />
SYNC LEVEL (– 40 IRE)<br />
Chrominance<br />
Phase<br />
(degrees)<br />
white 76.9 0 – – –<br />
yellow 69.0 62.1 37.9 100.0 167.1<br />
cyan 56.1 87.7 12.3 100.0 283.5<br />
green 48.2 81.9 7.3 89.2 240.7<br />
magenta 36.2 81.9 –4.8 77.1 60.7<br />
red 28.2 87.7 –15.6 72.1 103.5<br />
blue 15.4 62.1 –15.6 46.4 347.1<br />
black 7.5 0 – – –
304 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Luminance<br />
(IRE)<br />
Chrominance<br />
Level<br />
(IRE)<br />
Minimum<br />
Chrominance<br />
Excursion<br />
(IRE)<br />
Maximum<br />
Chrominance<br />
Excursion<br />
(IRE)<br />
Table 8.11. 100/7.5/100/7.5 (100%) <strong>NTSC</strong> Color Bars.<br />
Chrominance<br />
Phase<br />
(degrees)<br />
white 100.0 0 – – –<br />
yellow 89.5 82.8 48.1 130.8 167.1<br />
cyan 72.3 117.0 13.9 130.8 283.5<br />
green 61.8 109.2 7.2 116.4 240.7<br />
magenta 45.7 109.2 –8.9 100.3 60.7<br />
red 35.2 117.0 –23.3 93.6 103.5<br />
blue 18.0 82.8 –23.3 59.4 347.1<br />
black 7.5 0 – – –<br />
White<br />
Yellow<br />
Cyan<br />
Green<br />
gamma-corrected RGB (gamma = 1/0.45)<br />
R´ 191 191 0 0 191 191 0 0<br />
G´ 191 191 191 191 0 0 0 0<br />
B´ 191 0 191 0<br />
linear RGB<br />
191 0 191 0<br />
R 135 135 0 0 135 135 0 0<br />
G 135 135 135 135 0 0 0 0<br />
B 135 0 135 0<br />
YCbCr<br />
135 0 135 0<br />
Y 180 162 131 112 84 65 35 16<br />
Cb 128 44 156 72 184 100 212 128<br />
Cr 128 142 44 58 198 212 114 128<br />
Table 8.12. RGB <strong>and</strong> YCbCr Values for 75% <strong>NTSC</strong> Color Bars.<br />
Magenta<br />
Red<br />
Blue<br />
Black
White<br />
Yellow<br />
Cyan<br />
Green<br />
gamma-corrected RGB (gamma = 1/0.45)<br />
R´ 255 255 0 0 255 255 0 0<br />
G´ 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0<br />
B´ 255 0 255 0<br />
linear RGB<br />
255 0 255 0<br />
R 255 255 0 0 255 255 0 0<br />
G 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0<br />
B 255 0 255 0<br />
YCbCr<br />
255 0 255 0<br />
Y 235 210 170 145 106 81 41 16<br />
Cb 128 16 166 54 202 90 240 128<br />
Cr 128 146 16 34 222 240 110 128<br />
Table 8.13. RGB <strong>and</strong> YCbCr Values for 100% <strong>NTSC</strong> Color Bars.<br />
Figure8.29illustratesthevideowaveform<br />
for 75% color bars. Figure 8.30 shows a typical<br />
vectorscope display for full-screen 75% <strong>PAL</strong><br />
color bars.<br />
Tables 8.14, 8.15, <strong>and</strong> 8.16 list the luminance<br />
<strong>and</strong> chrominance levels for the three<br />
common color bar formats for <strong>PAL</strong>.<br />
For reference, the RGB <strong>and</strong> YCbCr values<br />
to generate the st<strong>and</strong>ard <strong>PAL</strong> color bars are<br />
shown in Tables 8.17, 8.18, <strong>and</strong> 8.19. RGB is<br />
assumed to have a range of 0–255; YCbCr is<br />
assumed to have a range of 16–235 for Y <strong>and</strong><br />
16–240 for Cb <strong>and</strong> Cr.<br />
Magenta<br />
Red<br />
Blue<br />
EIA Color Bars (<strong>NTSC</strong>)<br />
Video Test Signals 305<br />
Black<br />
The EIA color bars (Figure 8.28 <strong>and</strong> Table<br />
8.10) are a part of the EIA-189-A st<strong>and</strong>ard. The<br />
seven bars (gray, yellow, cyan, green, magenta,<br />
red, <strong>and</strong> blue) are at 75% amplitude, 100% saturation.<br />
The duration of each color bar is 1/7 of<br />
the active portion of the scan line. Note that<br />
theblackbarinFigure8.28<strong>and</strong>Table8.10is<br />
not part of the st<strong>and</strong>ard <strong>and</strong> is shown for reference<br />
only. The color bar test signal allows<br />
checking for hue <strong>and</strong> color saturation accuracy.
306 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Luminance<br />
(volts)<br />
Peak-to-Peak Chrominance<br />
U axis<br />
(volts)<br />
V axis<br />
(volts)<br />
Total<br />
(volts)<br />
Line n<br />
(135° burst)<br />
Table 8.14. 100/0/75/0 (75%) <strong>PAL</strong> Color Bars.<br />
Chrominance<br />
Phase<br />
(degrees)<br />
Line n + 1<br />
(225° burst)<br />
white 0.700 0 – – – –<br />
yellow 0.465 0.459 0.105 0.470 167 193<br />
cyan 0.368 0.155 0.646 0.664 283.5 76.5<br />
green 0.308 0.304 0.541 0.620 240.5 119.5<br />
magenta 0.217 0.304 0.541 0.620 60.5 299.5<br />
red 0.157 0.155 0.646 0.664 103.5 256.5<br />
blue 0.060 0.459 0.105 0.470 347 13.0<br />
black 0 0 0 0 – –<br />
Luminance<br />
(volts)<br />
Peak-to-Peak Chrominance<br />
U axis<br />
(volts)<br />
V axis<br />
(volts)<br />
Total<br />
(volts)<br />
Line n<br />
(135° burst)<br />
Table 8.15. 100/0/100/0 (100%) <strong>PAL</strong> Color Bars.<br />
Chrominance<br />
Phase<br />
(degrees)<br />
Line n + 1<br />
(225° burst)<br />
white 0.700 0 – – – –<br />
yellow 0.620 0.612 0.140 0.627 167 193<br />
cyan 0.491 0.206 0.861 0.885 283.5 76.5<br />
green 0.411 0.405 0.721 0.827 240.5 119.5<br />
magenta 0.289 0.405 0.721 0.827 60.5 299.5<br />
red 0.209 0.206 0.861 0.885 103.5 256.5<br />
blue 0.080 0.612 0.140 0.627 347 13.0<br />
black 0 0 0 0 – –
100 IRE<br />
43 IRE<br />
21.43 IRE<br />
21.43 IRE<br />
Luminance<br />
(volts)<br />
4.43 MHZ<br />
COLOR BURST<br />
(10 CYCLES)<br />
Peak-to-Peak Chrominance<br />
U axis<br />
(volts)<br />
WHITE<br />
V axis<br />
(volts)<br />
YELLOW<br />
+ 100<br />
+ 66<br />
+ 32<br />
CYAN<br />
+ 53<br />
+ 6<br />
Total<br />
(volts)<br />
Table 8.16. 100/0/100/25 (98%) <strong>PAL</strong> Color Bars.<br />
GREEN<br />
+ 88<br />
+ 44<br />
0<br />
MAGENTA<br />
+ 75<br />
+ 31<br />
– 13<br />
RED<br />
+ 69<br />
+ 22<br />
Line n<br />
(135° burst)<br />
BLUE<br />
+ 43<br />
+ 9<br />
– 25 – 25<br />
BLACK<br />
Video Test Signals 307<br />
Chrominance<br />
Phase<br />
(degrees)<br />
Line n + 1<br />
(225° burst)<br />
white 0.700 0 – – – –<br />
yellow 0.640 0.459 0.105 0.470 167 193<br />
cyan 0.543 0.155 0.646 0.664 283.5 76.5<br />
green 0.483 0.304 0.541 0.620 240.5 119.5<br />
magenta 0.392 0.304 0.541 0.620 60.5 299.5<br />
red 0.332 0.155 0.646 0.664 103.5 256.5<br />
blue 0.235 0.459 0.105 0.470 347 13.0<br />
black 0 0 0 0 – –<br />
Figure 8.29. IRE Values for 75% <strong>PAL</strong> Color Bars.<br />
WHITE LEVEL (100 IRE)<br />
BLACK / BLANK LEVEL (0 IRE)<br />
SYNC LEVEL (– 43 IRE)
308 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Figure 8.30. Typical Vectorscope Display for 75% <strong>PAL</strong> Color Bars.
White<br />
Yellow<br />
Cyan<br />
Green<br />
gamma-corrected RGB (gamma = 1/0.45)<br />
R´ 255 191 0 0 191 191 0 0<br />
G´ 255 191 191 191 0 0 0 0<br />
B´ 255 0 191 0<br />
linear RGB<br />
191 0 191 0<br />
R 255 135 0 0 135 135 0 0<br />
G 255 135 135 135 0 0 0 0<br />
B 255 0 135 0<br />
YCbCr<br />
135 0 135 0<br />
Y 235 162 131 112 84 65 35 16<br />
Cb 128 44 156 72 184 100 212 128<br />
Cr 128 142 44 58 198 212 114 128<br />
Table 8.17. RGB <strong>and</strong> YCbCr Values for 75% <strong>PAL</strong> Color Bars.<br />
White<br />
Yellow<br />
Cyan<br />
Green<br />
gamma-corrected RGB (gamma = 1/0.45)<br />
R´ 255 255 0 0 255 255 0 0<br />
G´ 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0<br />
B´ 255 0 255 0<br />
linear RGB<br />
255 0 255 0<br />
R 255 255 0 0 255 255 0 0<br />
G 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0<br />
B 255 0 255 0<br />
YCbCr<br />
255 0 255 0<br />
Y 235 210 170 145 106 81 41 16<br />
Cb 128 16 166 54 202 90 240 128<br />
Cr 128 146 16 34 222 240 110 128<br />
Table 8.18. RGB <strong>and</strong> YCbCr Values for 100% <strong>PAL</strong> Color Bars.<br />
Magenta<br />
Magenta<br />
Red<br />
Red<br />
Blue<br />
Blue<br />
Video Test Signals 309<br />
Black<br />
Black
310 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
EBU Color Bars (<strong>PAL</strong>)<br />
The EBU color bars are similar to the EIA<br />
color bars, except a 100 IRE white level is used<br />
(see Figure 8.29 <strong>and</strong> Table 8.14). The six colored<br />
bars (yellow, cyan, green, magenta, red,<br />
<strong>and</strong> blue) are at 75% amplitude, 100% saturation,<br />
while the white bar is at 100% amplitude.<br />
The duration of each color bar is 1/7 of the<br />
active portion of the scan line. Note that the<br />
black bar in Figure 8.29 <strong>and</strong> Table 8.14 is not<br />
part of the st<strong>and</strong>ard <strong>and</strong> is shown for reference<br />
only. The color bar test signal allows checking<br />
for hue <strong>and</strong> color saturation accuracy.<br />
SMPTE Bars (<strong>NTSC</strong>)<br />
White<br />
Yellow<br />
Cyan<br />
Table 8.19. RGB <strong>and</strong> YCbCr Values for 98% <strong>PAL</strong> Color Bars.<br />
This split-field test signal is composed of the<br />
EIA color bars for the first 2/3 of the field, the<br />
Reverse Blue bars for the next 1/12 of the<br />
Green<br />
gamma-corrected RGB (gamma = 1/0.45)<br />
R´ 255 255 44 44 255 255 44 44<br />
G´ 255 255 255 255 44 44 44 44<br />
B´ 255 44 255 44<br />
linear RGB<br />
255 44 255 44<br />
R 255 255 5 5 255 255 5 5<br />
G 255 255 255 255 5 5 5 5<br />
B 255 5 255 5<br />
YCbCr<br />
255 5 255 5<br />
Y 235 216 186 167 139 120 90 16<br />
Cb 128 44 156 72 184 100 212 128<br />
Cr 128 142 44 58 198 212 114 128<br />
Magenta<br />
Red<br />
Blue<br />
field, <strong>and</strong> the PLUGE test signal for the<br />
remainder of the field.<br />
Reverse Blue Bars<br />
Black<br />
The Reverse Blue bars are composed of the<br />
blue, magenta, <strong>and</strong> cyan colors bars from the<br />
EIA/EBU color bars, but are arranged in a different<br />
order—blue, black, magenta, black,<br />
cyan, black, <strong>and</strong> white. The duration of each<br />
color bar is 1/7 of the active portion of the scan<br />
line. Typically, Reverse Blue bars are used with<br />
the EIA or EBU color bar signal in a split-field<br />
arrangement, with the EIA/EBU color bars<br />
comprising the first 3/4 of the field <strong>and</strong> the<br />
Reverse Blue bars comprising the remainder<br />
of the field. This split-field arrangement eases<br />
adjustment of chrominance <strong>and</strong> hue on a color<br />
monitor.
PLUGE<br />
PLUGE (Picture Line-Up Generating Equipment)<br />
is a visual black reference, with one area<br />
blacker-than-black, one area at black, <strong>and</strong> one<br />
area lighter-than-black. The brightness of the<br />
monitor is adjusted so that the black <strong>and</strong><br />
blacker-than-black areas are indistinguishable<br />
from each other <strong>and</strong> the lighter-than-black area<br />
is slightly lighter (the contrast should be at the<br />
normal setting). Additional test signals, such<br />
as a white pulse <strong>and</strong> modulated IQ signals are<br />
usually added to facilitate testing <strong>and</strong> monitor<br />
alignment.<br />
3.58 MHZ<br />
COLOR BURST<br />
(9 CYCLES)<br />
+ 20<br />
– 20<br />
– I<br />
WHITE<br />
+ 100<br />
+ Q<br />
+ 27.5 + 27.5<br />
– 12.5 – 12.5<br />
+ 3.5<br />
+ 11.5<br />
MICROSECONDS = 9.7 19.1 28.5 38 47 49.6 52 54.5<br />
BLACK LEVEL (7.5 IRE)<br />
BLANK LEVEL (0 IRE)<br />
SYNC LEVEL (– 40 IRE)<br />
Video Test Signals 311<br />
The <strong>NTSC</strong> PLUGE test signal (shown in<br />
Figure 8.31) is composed of a 7.5 IRE (black<br />
level) pedestal with a 40 IRE “–I” phase modulation,<br />
a 100 IRE white pulse, a 40 IRE “+Q”<br />
phase modulation, <strong>and</strong> 3.5 IRE, 7.5 IRE, <strong>and</strong><br />
11.5 IRE pedestals. Typically, PLUGE is used<br />
as part of the SMPTE bars.<br />
For <strong>PAL</strong>, each country has its own slightly<br />
different PLUGE configuration, with most differences<br />
being the black pedestal level used,<br />
<strong>and</strong> work is being done on a st<strong>and</strong>ard test signal.<br />
Figure 8.32 illustrates a typical <strong>PAL</strong><br />
PLUGE test signal. Usually used as a fullscreen<br />
test signal, it is composed of a 0 IRE<br />
Figure 8.31. PLUGE Test Signal for <strong>NTSC</strong>. IRE values are indicated.
312 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
pedestal with PLUGE (–2 IRE,0IRE,<strong>and</strong>2<br />
IRE pedestals) <strong>and</strong> a white pulse. The white<br />
pulse may have five levels of brightness (0, 25,<br />
50, 75, <strong>and</strong> 100 IRE), depending on the scan<br />
line number, as shown in Figure 8.32. The<br />
PLUGE is displayed on scan lines that have<br />
non-zero IRE white pulses. ITU-R BT.1221 discusses<br />
considerations for various <strong>PAL</strong> systems.<br />
4.43 MHZ<br />
COLOR BURST<br />
(10 CYCLES)<br />
+ 21.43<br />
– 21.43<br />
– 2<br />
+ 2<br />
Y Bars<br />
WHITE LEVEL (IRE)<br />
+ 100<br />
MICROSECONDS = 22.5 24.8 27.1 29.4 41 52.6<br />
The Y bars consist of the luminance-only levels<br />
of the EIA/EBU color bars; however, the black<br />
level (7.5 IRE for <strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>and</strong> 0 IRE for <strong>PAL</strong>) is<br />
included <strong>and</strong> the color burst is still present.<br />
The duration of each luminance bar is therefore<br />
1/8 of the active portion of the scan line. Y<br />
bars are useful for color monitor adjustment<br />
<strong>and</strong> measuring luminance nonlinearity. Typically,<br />
the Y bars signal is used with the EIA or<br />
EBU color bar signal in a split-field arrangement,<br />
with the EIA/EBU color bars comprising<br />
the first 3/4 of the field <strong>and</strong> the Y bars<br />
signal comprising the remainder of the field.<br />
+ 75<br />
+ 50<br />
+ 25<br />
0<br />
FULL DISPLAY<br />
LINE NUMBERS<br />
63 / 375<br />
115 / 427<br />
167 / 479<br />
219 / 531<br />
271 / 583<br />
BLANK / BLACK LEVEL (0 IRE)<br />
SYNC LEVEL (– 43 IRE)<br />
Figure 8.32. PLUGE Test Signal for <strong>PAL</strong>. IRE values are indicated.
Red Field<br />
The Red Field signal consists of a 75% amplitude,<br />
100% saturation red chrominance signal.<br />
This is useful as the human eye is sensitive to<br />
static noise intermixed in a red field. Distortions<br />
that cause small errors in picture quality<br />
canbeexaminedvisuallyfortheeffectonthe<br />
picture. Typically, the Red Field signal is used<br />
with the EIA/EBU color bars signal in a splitfield<br />
arrangement, with the EIA/EBU color<br />
bars comprising the first 3/4 of the field, <strong>and</strong><br />
the Red Field signal comprising the remainder<br />
of the field.<br />
10-Step Staircase<br />
This test signal is composed of ten unmodulated<br />
luminance steps of 10 IRE each, ranging<br />
from0IREto100IRE,showninFigure8.33.<br />
Thistestsignalmaybeusedtomeasureluminance<br />
nonlinearity.<br />
COLOR BURST<br />
10<br />
IRE<br />
LEVELS<br />
20<br />
30<br />
40<br />
50<br />
60<br />
Modulated Ramp<br />
MICROSECONDS = 17.5 21.5 25.5 29.5 33.5 37.5 41.5 45.5 49.5 53.5 61.8<br />
70<br />
80<br />
90<br />
100<br />
Video Test Signals 313<br />
The modulated ramp test signal, shown in Figure<br />
8.34, is composed of a luminance ramp<br />
from 0 IRE to either 80 or 100 IRE, superimposed<br />
with modulated chrominance that has a<br />
phase of 0° ±1° relative to the burst. The 80<br />
IRE ramp provides testing of the normal operating<br />
range of the system; a 100 IRE ramp may<br />
be used to optionally test the entire operating<br />
range. The peak-to-peak modulated chrominance<br />
is 40 ±0.5 IRE for (M) <strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>and</strong> 42.86<br />
±0.5 IRE for (B, D, G, H, I) <strong>PAL</strong>. Note a 0 IRE<br />
setup is used. The rise <strong>and</strong> fall times at the<br />
start <strong>and</strong> end of the modulated ramp envelope<br />
are 400 ±25 ns (<strong>NTSC</strong> systems) or approximately<br />
1 µs (<strong>PAL</strong> systems). This test signal<br />
maybeusedtomeasuredifferentialgain.The<br />
modulated ramp signal is preferred over a 5step<br />
or 10-step modulated staircase signal<br />
when testing digital systems.<br />
WHITE LEVEL (100 IRE)<br />
BLANK LEVEL (0 IRE)<br />
SYNC LEVEL<br />
Figure 8.33. Ten-Step Staircase Test Signal for <strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>PAL</strong>.
314 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Modulated Staircase<br />
The 5-step modulated staircase signal (a 10step<br />
version is also used), shown in Figure<br />
8.35, consists of 5 luminance steps, superimposed<br />
with modulated chrominance that has a<br />
phase of 0° ±1° relative to the burst. The peakto-peak<br />
modulated chrominance amplitude is<br />
40 ±0.5 IRE for (M) <strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>and</strong> 42.86 ±0.5 IRE<br />
for (B, D, G, H, I) <strong>PAL</strong>. Note a 0 IRE setup is<br />
used. The rise <strong>and</strong> fall times of each modulation<br />
packet envelope are 400 ±25 ns (<strong>NTSC</strong><br />
systems) or approximately 1 µs (<strong>PAL</strong> systems).<br />
The luminance IRE levels for the 5-step<br />
modulatedstaircasesignalareshowninFigure<br />
8.35. This test signal may be used to measure<br />
differential gain. The modulated ramp<br />
signal is preferred over a 5-step or 10-step<br />
modulated staircase signal when testing digital<br />
systems.<br />
COLOR BURST<br />
Modulated Pedestal<br />
The modulated pedestal test signal (also called<br />
a three-level chrominance bar), shown in Figure<br />
8.36, is composed of a 50 IRE luminance<br />
pedestal, superimposed with three amplitudes<br />
of modulated chrominance that has a phase<br />
relative to the burst of –90° ±1°. The peak-topeak<br />
amplitudes of the modulated chrominance<br />
are 20 ±0.5, 40 ±0.5, <strong>and</strong> 80 ±0.5 IRE for<br />
(M) <strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>and</strong> 20 ±0.5, 60 ±0.5, <strong>and</strong> 100 ±0.5<br />
IREfor(B,D,G,H,I)<strong>PAL</strong>.Notea0IREsetup<br />
is used. The rise <strong>and</strong> fall times of each modulation<br />
packet envelope are 400 ±25 ns (<strong>NTSC</strong><br />
systems) or approximately 1 µs (<strong>PAL</strong> systems).<br />
This test signal may be used to measure<br />
chrominance-to-luminance intermodulation<br />
<strong>and</strong> chrominance nonlinear gain.<br />
MICROSECONDS = 14.9 20.2 51.5 56.7 61.8<br />
80 IRE<br />
BLANK LEVEL (0 IRE)<br />
SYNC LEVEL<br />
Figure 8.34. 80 IRE Modulated Ramp Test Signal for <strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>PAL</strong>.
COLOR BURST<br />
0<br />
18<br />
36<br />
54<br />
72<br />
90<br />
Video Test Signals 315<br />
BLANK LEVEL (0 IRE)<br />
SYNC LEVEL<br />
Figure 8.35. Five-Step Modulated Staircase Test Signal for <strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>PAL</strong>.<br />
COLOR BURST<br />
50 IRE<br />
± 10 IRE<br />
(± 10)<br />
± 20 IRE<br />
(± 30)<br />
± 40 IRE<br />
(± 50)<br />
MICROSECONDS = 10.0 17.9 29.8 41.7 53.6 61.6<br />
BLANK LEVEL (0 IRE)<br />
SYNC LEVEL<br />
Figure 8.36. Modulated Pedestal Test Signal for <strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>PAL</strong>.<br />
<strong>PAL</strong> IRE values are shown in parentheses.
316 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Multiburst<br />
The multiburst test signal for (M) <strong>NTSC</strong>,<br />
shown in Figure 8.37, consists of a white flag<br />
with a peak amplitude of 100 ±1 IRE<strong>and</strong>six<br />
frequency packets, each a specific frequency.<br />
The packets have a 40 ±1 IREpedestalwith<br />
peak-to-peak amplitudes of 60 ±0.5IRE.Notea<br />
0 IRE setup is used <strong>and</strong> the starting <strong>and</strong> ending<br />
point of each packet is at zero phase.<br />
The ITU multiburst test signal for (B, D, G,<br />
H, I) <strong>PAL</strong>, shown in Figure 8.38, consists of a 4<br />
µs white flag with a peak amplitude of 80 ±1<br />
IRE <strong>and</strong> six frequency packets, each a specific<br />
frequency. The packets have a 50 ±1 IREpedestal<br />
with peak-to-peak amplitudes of 60 ±0.5<br />
IRE. Note the starting <strong>and</strong> ending points of<br />
each packet are at zero phase. The gaps<br />
between packets are 0.4–2.0 µs. The ITU multiburst<br />
test signal may be present on line 18.<br />
The multiburst signals are used to test the<br />
frequency response of the system by measuring<br />
the peak-to-peak amplitudes of the packets.<br />
COLOR BURST<br />
100 IRE<br />
0.5<br />
(4)<br />
1.25<br />
(8)<br />
Line Bar<br />
The line bar is a single 100 ±0.5 IRE (reference<br />
white) pulse of 10 µs (<strong>PAL</strong>),18µs (<strong>NTSC</strong>),or<br />
25 µs (<strong>PAL</strong>) that occurs anywhere within the<br />
active scan line time (rise <strong>and</strong> fall times are ≤ 1<br />
µs). Note the color burst is not present, <strong>and</strong> a 0<br />
IRE setup is used. This test signal is used to<br />
measure line time distortion (line tilt or H tilt).<br />
A digital encoder or decoder does not generate<br />
line time distortion; the distortion is generated<br />
primarily by the analog filters <strong>and</strong> transmission<br />
channel.<br />
Multipulse<br />
MHZ<br />
(CYCLES)<br />
2<br />
(10)<br />
3<br />
(14)<br />
3.58<br />
(16)<br />
4.2<br />
(18)<br />
Figure 8.37. Multiburst Test Signal for <strong>NTSC</strong>.<br />
The (M) <strong>NTSC</strong> multipulse contains a 2T pulse<br />
<strong>and</strong> 25T <strong>and</strong> 12.5T pulses with various high-frequency<br />
components, as shown in Figure 8.39.<br />
The (B, D, G, H, I) <strong>PAL</strong> multipulse is similar,<br />
except 20T <strong>and</strong> 10T pulses are used, <strong>and</strong> there<br />
is no 7.5 IRE setup. This test signal is typically<br />
used to measure the frequency response of the<br />
transmission channel.<br />
70 IRE<br />
40 IRE<br />
10 IRE<br />
BLANK LEVEL (0 IRE)<br />
SYNC LEVEL
COLOR BURST<br />
0.5 1 2 4 4.8 5.8<br />
MICROSECONDS = 12 20 24 30 36 42 48 54 62<br />
COLOR BURST<br />
MHZ<br />
Figure 8.38. ITU Multiburst Test Signal for <strong>PAL</strong>.<br />
2T<br />
1.0<br />
25T<br />
(20T)<br />
2.0<br />
12.5T<br />
(10T)<br />
3.0<br />
(4.0)<br />
12.5T<br />
(10T)<br />
3.58<br />
(4.8)<br />
12.5T<br />
(10T)<br />
4.2<br />
(5.8)<br />
12.5T<br />
(10T)<br />
MHZ<br />
(MHZ)<br />
Video Test Signals 317<br />
80 IRE<br />
50 IRE<br />
20 IRE<br />
BLANK LEVEL (0 IRE)<br />
SYNC LEVEL<br />
Figure 8.39. Multipulse Test Signal for <strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>PAL</strong>. <strong>PAL</strong> values are shown in parentheses.
318 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Field Square Wave<br />
The field square wave contains 100 ±0.5 IRE<br />
pulses for the entire active line time for odd<br />
fields <strong>and</strong> blanked scan lines for even fields.<br />
Note the color burst is not present <strong>and</strong> a 0 IRE<br />
setup is used. This test signal is used to measure<br />
field time distortion (field tilt or V tilt). A<br />
digital encoder or decoder does not generate<br />
field time distortion; the distortion is generated<br />
primarily by the analog filters <strong>and</strong> transmission<br />
channel.<br />
3.58 MHZ<br />
COLOR BURST<br />
(9 CYCLES)<br />
+ 20<br />
- 20<br />
100 IRE<br />
2T 12.5T<br />
Composite Test Signal<br />
MICROSECONDS = 12 30 34 37 42 46 49 52 55 58 61<br />
NTC-7 Version for <strong>NTSC</strong><br />
The NTC (U. S. Network Transmission Committee)<br />
has developed a composite test signal<br />
that may be used to test several video parameters,<br />
rather than using multiple test signals.<br />
The NTC-7 composite test signal for <strong>NTSC</strong><br />
systems (shown in Figure 8.40) consists of a<br />
100 IRE line bar, a 2T pulse, a 12.5T chrominance<br />
pulse, <strong>and</strong> a 5-step modulated staircase<br />
signal.<br />
0<br />
18<br />
36<br />
54<br />
72<br />
90<br />
BLANK LEVEL (0 IRE)<br />
SYNC LEVEL (– 40 IRE)<br />
Figure 8.40. NTC-7 Composite Test Signal for <strong>NTSC</strong>, With Corresponding IRE Values.
The line bar has a peak amplitude of 100<br />
±0.5 IRE, <strong>and</strong> 10–90% rise <strong>and</strong> fall times of 125<br />
±5 nswithanintegratedsine-squaredshape.It<br />
has a width at the 60 IRE level of 18 µs.<br />
The 2T pulse has a peak amplitude of 100<br />
±0.5 IRE, with a half-amplitude width of 250<br />
±10 ns.<br />
The 12.5T chrominance pulse has a peak<br />
amplitude of 100 ±0.5 IRE, with a half-amplitude<br />
width of 1562.5 ±50 ns.<br />
The 5-step modulated staircase signal consists<br />
of 5 luminance steps superimposed with a<br />
40 ±0.5 IRE subcarrier that has a phase of 0°<br />
±1° relative to the burst. The rise <strong>and</strong> fall times<br />
of each modulation packet envelope are 400<br />
±25 ns.<br />
TheNTC-7compositetestsignalmaybe<br />
present on line 17.<br />
4.43 MHZ<br />
COLOR BURST<br />
(10 CYCLES)<br />
2T<br />
100 IRE 100<br />
MICROSECONDS = 12 22 26 30 40 44 48 52 56 60<br />
0<br />
20<br />
40<br />
60<br />
80<br />
Video Test Signals 319<br />
ITU Version for <strong>PAL</strong><br />
The ITU (BT.628 <strong>and</strong> BT.473) has developed a<br />
composite test signal that may be used to test<br />
several video parameters, rather than using<br />
multiple test signals. The ITU composite test<br />
signal for <strong>PAL</strong> systems (shown in Figure 8.41)<br />
consists of a white flag, a 2T pulse, <strong>and</strong> a 5-step<br />
modulated staircase signal.<br />
The white flag has a peak amplitude of 100<br />
±1 IRE<strong>and</strong>awidthof10µs.<br />
The 2T pulse has a peak amplitude of 100<br />
±0.5 IRE, with a half-amplitude width of 200<br />
±10 ns.<br />
The 5-step modulated staircase signal consists<br />
of 5 luminance steps (whose IRE values<br />
are shown in Figure 8.41) superimposed with a<br />
42.86 ±0.5 IRE subcarrier that has a phase of<br />
60° ±1° relative to the U axis. The rise <strong>and</strong> fall<br />
times of each modulation packet envelope are<br />
approximately 1 µs.<br />
BLANK LEVEL (0 IRE)<br />
SYNC LEVEL (– 43 IRE)<br />
Figure 8.41. ITU Composite Test Signal for <strong>PAL</strong>, With Corresponding IRE Values.
320 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
The ITU composite test signal may be<br />
present on line 330.<br />
U.K. Version<br />
The United Kingdom allows the use of a<br />
slightly different test signal since the 10T<br />
pulse is more sensitive to delay errors than the<br />
20T pulse (at the expense of occupying less<br />
chrominance b<strong>and</strong>width). Selection of an<br />
appropriate pulse width is a trade-off between<br />
occupying the <strong>PAL</strong> chrominance b<strong>and</strong>width as<br />
fully as possible <strong>and</strong> obtaining a pulse with sufficient<br />
sensitivity to delay errors. Thus, the<br />
national test signal (developed by the British<br />
Broadcasting Corporation <strong>and</strong> the Independent<br />
Television Authority) in Figure 8.42 may<br />
be present on lines 19 <strong>and</strong> 332 for (I) <strong>PAL</strong> systems<br />
in the United Kingdom.<br />
4.43 MHZ<br />
COLOR BURST<br />
(10 CYCLES)<br />
2T 10T<br />
100 IRE 100<br />
MICROSECONDS = 12 22 26 30 34 40 44 48 52 56 60<br />
The white flag has a peak amplitude of 100<br />
±1 IRE<strong>and</strong>awidthof10µs.<br />
The 2T pulse has a peak amplitude of 100<br />
±0.5 IRE, with a half-amplitude width of 200<br />
±10 ns.<br />
The 10T chrominance pulse has a peak<br />
amplitude of 100 ±0.5 IRE.<br />
The 5-step modulated staircase signal consists<br />
of 5 luminance steps (whose IRE values<br />
are shown in Figure 8.42) superimposed with a<br />
21.43 ±0.5 IRE subcarrier that has a phase of<br />
60° ±1° relative to the U axis. The rise <strong>and</strong> fall<br />
times of each modulation packet envelope is<br />
approximately 1 µs.<br />
Figure 8.42. United Kingdom (I) <strong>PAL</strong> National Test Signal #1,<br />
With Corresponding IRE Values.<br />
0<br />
20<br />
40<br />
60<br />
80<br />
BLANK LEVEL (0 IRE)<br />
SYNC LEVEL (– 43 IRE)
Combination Test Signal<br />
NTC-7 Version for <strong>NTSC</strong><br />
The NTC (U. S. Network Transmission Committee)<br />
has also developed a combination test<br />
signal that may be used to test several video<br />
parameters, rather than using multiple test signals.<br />
The NTC-7 combination test signal for<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong> systems (shown in Figure 8.43) consists<br />
of a white flag, a multiburst, <strong>and</strong> a modulated<br />
pedestal signal.<br />
The white flag has a peak amplitude of 100<br />
±1IRE<strong>and</strong>awidthof4µs.<br />
The multiburst has a 50 ±1 IREpedestal<br />
with peak-to-peak amplitudes of 50 ±0.5 IRE.<br />
The starting point of each frequency packet is<br />
at zero phase. The width of the 0.5 MHz packet<br />
is 5 µs; the width of the remaining packets is 3<br />
µs.<br />
COLOR BURST<br />
100 IRE<br />
MHZ<br />
0.5 1 2 3 3.58 4.2<br />
MICROSECONDS = 12 18 24 28 32 36 40 46 50 54 60<br />
Video Test Signals 321<br />
The 3-step modulated pedestal is composed<br />
of a 50 IRE luminance pedestal, superimposed<br />
with three amplitudes of modulated<br />
chrominance (20 ±0.5, 40 ±0.5, <strong>and</strong> 80 ±0.5 IRE<br />
peak-to-peak) that have a phase of –90° ±1° relative<br />
to the burst. The rise <strong>and</strong> fall times of<br />
each modulation packet envelope are 400 ±25<br />
ns.<br />
The NTC-7 combination test signal may be<br />
present on line 280.<br />
ITU Version for <strong>PAL</strong><br />
The ITU (BT.473) has developed a combination<br />
test signal that may be used to test several<br />
video parameters, rather than using multiple<br />
test signals. The ITU combination test signal<br />
for <strong>PAL</strong> systems (shown in Figure 8.44) consists<br />
of a white flag, a 2T pulse, a 20T modulated<br />
chrominance pulse, <strong>and</strong> a 5-step<br />
luminance staircase signal.<br />
Figure 8.43. NTC-7 Combination Test Signal for <strong>NTSC</strong>.<br />
50 IRE<br />
BLANK LEVEL (0 IRE)<br />
SYNC LEVEL
322 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
The line bar has a peak amplitude of 100 ±1<br />
IRE <strong>and</strong> a width of 10 µs.<br />
The 2T pulse has a peak amplitude of 100<br />
±0.5 IRE, with a half-amplitude width of 200<br />
±10 ns.<br />
The 20T chrominance pulse has a peak<br />
amplitude of 100 ±0.5 IRE, with a half-amplitude<br />
width of 2.0 ±0.06 µs.<br />
The 5-step luminance staircase signal consists<br />
of 5 luminance steps, at 20, 40, 60, 80 <strong>and</strong><br />
100 ±0.5 IRE.<br />
The ITU combination test signal may be<br />
present on line 17.<br />
ITU ITS Version for <strong>PAL</strong><br />
The ITU (BT.473) has developed a combination<br />
ITS (insertion test signal) that may be<br />
used to test several <strong>PAL</strong> video parameters,<br />
rather than using multiple test signals. The<br />
ITU combination ITS for <strong>PAL</strong> systems (shown<br />
in Figure 8.45) consists of a 3-step modulated<br />
pedestal with peak-to-peak amplitudes of 20,<br />
4.43 MHZ<br />
COLOR BURST<br />
(10 CYCLES)<br />
2T 20T<br />
100 IRE 100 IRE<br />
MICROSECONDS = 12 22 26 32 40 44 48 52 56 62<br />
Figure 8.44. ITU Combination Test Signal for <strong>PAL</strong>.<br />
60, <strong>and</strong> 100 ±1 IRE, <strong>and</strong> an extended subcarrier<br />
packet with a peak-to-peak amplitude of 60<br />
±1 IRE. The rise <strong>and</strong> fall times of each subcarrier<br />
packet envelope are approximately 1 µs.<br />
The phase of each subcarrier packet is 60°<br />
±1° relative to the U axis. The tolerance on the<br />
50 IRE level is ±1IRE.<br />
TheITUcompositeITSmaybepresenton<br />
line 331.<br />
U. K. Version<br />
The United Kingdom allows the use of a<br />
slightly different test signal, as shown in Figure<br />
8.46. It may be present on lines 20 <strong>and</strong> 333<br />
for (I) <strong>PAL</strong> systems in the United Kingdom.<br />
The test signal consists of a 50 IRE luminance<br />
bar, part of which has a 100 IRE subcarrier<br />
superimposed that has a phase of 60°<br />
±1° relative to the U axis, <strong>and</strong> an extended<br />
burst of subcarrier on the second half of the<br />
scan line.<br />
20<br />
40<br />
60<br />
80<br />
BLANK LEVEL (0 IRE)<br />
SYNC LEVEL (– 43 IRE)
4.43 MHZ<br />
COLOR BURST<br />
(10 CYCLES)<br />
60<br />
40<br />
80<br />
20<br />
100<br />
IRE<br />
MICROSECONDS = 12 14 18 22 28 34 60<br />
Figure 8.45. ITU Combination ITS Test Signal for <strong>PAL</strong>.<br />
4.43 MHZ<br />
COLOR BURST<br />
(10 CYCLES)<br />
100 IRE<br />
50 IRE<br />
MICROSECONDS = 12 14 28 32 34 62<br />
Video Test Signals 323<br />
80 IRE<br />
50 IRE<br />
20 IRE<br />
BLANK LEVEL (0 IRE)<br />
SYNC LEVEL (– 43 IRE)<br />
21.43 IRE<br />
BLANK LEVEL (0 IRE)<br />
–21.43 IRE<br />
Figure 8.46. United Kingdom (I) <strong>PAL</strong> National Test Signal #2.<br />
SYNC LEVEL (– 43 IRE)
324 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
T Pulse<br />
Square waves with fast rise times cannot be<br />
used for testing video systems, since attenuation<br />
<strong>and</strong> phase shift of out-of-b<strong>and</strong> components<br />
cause ringing in the output signal, obscuring<br />
the in-b<strong>and</strong> distortions being measured. T, or<br />
sin 2 , pulses are b<strong>and</strong>width-limited, so are used<br />
for testing video systems.<br />
The 2T pulse is shown in Figure 8.47 <strong>and</strong>,<br />
like the T pulse, is obtained mathematically by<br />
squaring a half-cycle of a sine wave. T pulses<br />
are specified in terms of half amplitude duration<br />
(HAD), which is the pulse width measured<br />
at 50% of the pulse amplitude. Pulses with<br />
HADs that are multiples of the time interval T<br />
–250 0 250<br />
(A)<br />
A<br />
50%<br />
1.0<br />
0.8<br />
0.6<br />
0.4<br />
0.2<br />
250 NS<br />
TIME (NS)<br />
0 1 2 3 4 5<br />
(C)<br />
are used to test video systems. As seen in Figures<br />
8.39 through 8.44, T, 2T, 12.5T <strong>and</strong> 25T<br />
pulses are common when testing <strong>NTSC</strong> video<br />
systems, whereas T, 2T, 10T, <strong>and</strong> 20T pulses<br />
are common for <strong>PAL</strong> video systems.<br />
T is the Nyquist interval or<br />
1/2FC where FC is the cutoff frequency of the video<br />
system.For<strong>NTSC</strong>,FCis 4 MHz, whereas FC for <strong>PAL</strong> systems is 5 MHz. Therefore, T for<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong> systems is 125 ns <strong>and</strong> for <strong>PAL</strong> systems it<br />
is 100 ns. For a T pulse with a HAD of 125 ns, a<br />
2T pulse has a HAD of 250 ns, <strong>and</strong> so on. The<br />
frequency spectra for the 2T pulse is shown in<br />
240 NS<br />
10%<br />
2A<br />
–250 0 250<br />
(B)<br />
A<br />
FREQUENCY (MHZ)<br />
90%<br />
TIME (NS)<br />
Figure 8.47. The T Pulse. (a) 2T pulse. (b) 2T step. (c) Frequency spectra of the 2T pulse.
Figure 8.47 <strong>and</strong> is representative of the energy<br />
content in a typical character generator waveform.<br />
To generate smooth rising <strong>and</strong> falling<br />
edges of most video signals, a T step (generated<br />
by integrating a T pulse) is typically used.<br />
Tstepshave10–90% rise/fall times of 0.964T<br />
<strong>and</strong> a well-defined b<strong>and</strong>width. The 2T step generated<br />
from a 2T pulse is shown in Figure 8.47.<br />
The 12.5T chrominance pulse, illustrated<br />
in Figure 8.48, is a good test signal to measure<br />
any chrominance-to-luminance timing error<br />
since its energy spectral distribution is<br />
bunched in two relatively narrow b<strong>and</strong>s. Using<br />
this signal detects differences in the luminance<br />
<strong>and</strong> chrominance phase distortion, but not<br />
between other frequency groups.<br />
0.5<br />
–1562.5 0 1562.5<br />
(A)<br />
50%<br />
0.5<br />
–0.5<br />
(B)<br />
1562.5 NS<br />
TIME (NS)<br />
TIME (NS)<br />
VBI Data<br />
50%<br />
1.0<br />
–1562.5 0 1562.5<br />
(C)<br />
1562.5 NS<br />
TIME (NS)<br />
VBI Data 325<br />
VBI (vertical blanking interval) data may be<br />
inserted up to about 5 scan lines into the active<br />
picture region to ensure it won't be deleted by<br />
equipment replacing the VBI, by DSS MPEG<br />
which deletes the VBI, or by cable systems<br />
inserting their own VBI data. This is common<br />
practice by Neilson <strong>and</strong> others to ensure their<br />
programming <strong>and</strong> commercial tracking data<br />
gets through the distribution systems to the<br />
receivers. In most cases, this will be unseen<br />
since it is masked by the TV’s overscan.<br />
Timecode<br />
Two types of time coding are commonly used,<br />
as defined by ANSI/SMPTE 12M <strong>and</strong> IEC 461:<br />
Figure 8.48. The 12.5T Chrominance Pulse. (a) Luma component.<br />
(b) Chroma component. (c) Addition of (a) <strong>and</strong> (b).
326 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
longitudinal timecode (LTC) <strong>and</strong> vertical interval<br />
timecode (VITC).<br />
The LTC is recorded on a separate audio<br />
track; as a result, the analog VCR must use<br />
high-b<strong>and</strong>width amplifiers <strong>and</strong> audio heads.<br />
This is due to the time code frequency increasing<br />
as tape speed increases, until the point that<br />
the frequency response of the system results<br />
in a distorted time code signal that may not be<br />
read reliably. At slower tape speeds, the time<br />
code frequency decreases, until at very low<br />
tape speeds or still pictures, the time code<br />
information is no longer recoverable.<br />
TheVITCisrecordedaspartofthevideo<br />
signal; as a result, the time code information is<br />
always available, regardless of the tape speed.<br />
However,theLTCallowsthetimecodesignal<br />
to be written without writing a video signal; the<br />
VITC requires the video signal to be changed if<br />
a change in time code information is required.<br />
The LTC therefore is useful for synchronizing<br />
multiple audio or audio/video sources.<br />
Frame Dropping<br />
If the field rate is 60/1.001 fields per second,<br />
straight counting at 60 fields per second yields<br />
an error of about 108 frames for each hour of<br />
running time. This may be h<strong>and</strong>led in one of<br />
three ways:<br />
Nondrop frame: During a continuous<br />
recording, each time count increases<br />
by 1 frame. In this mode, the drop<br />
frameflagwillbea“0.”<br />
Drop frame: To minimize the timing<br />
error, the first two frame numbers (00<br />
<strong>and</strong> 01) at the start of each minute,<br />
except for minutes 00, 10, 20, 30, 40,<br />
<strong>and</strong> 50, are omitted from the count. In<br />
this mode, the drop frame flag will be a<br />
“1.”<br />
Drop frame for (M) <strong>PAL</strong>: To minimize<br />
the timing error, the first four frame<br />
numbers (00 to 03) at the start of<br />
every second minute (even minute<br />
numbers) are omitted from the count,<br />
except for minutes 00, 20, <strong>and</strong> 40. In<br />
this mode, the drop frame flag will be a<br />
“1.”<br />
Even with drop framing, there is a longterm<br />
error of about 2.26 frames per 24 hours.<br />
This error accumulation is the reason timecode<br />
generators must be periodically reset if<br />
they are to maintain any correlation to the correct<br />
time-of-day. Typically, this “reset-to-realtime”<br />
is referred to as a “jam sync” procedure.<br />
Some jam sync implementations reset the<br />
timecode to 00:00:00.00 <strong>and</strong>, therefore, must<br />
occur at midnight; others allow a true re-sync<br />
to the correct time-of-day.<br />
One inherent problem with jam sync correction<br />
is the interruption of the timecode.<br />
Although this discontinuity may be brief, it<br />
may cause timecode readers to “hiccup” due to<br />
the interruption.<br />
Longitudinal Timecode (LTC)<br />
The LTC information is transferred using a<br />
separate serial interface, using the same electrical<br />
interface as the AES/EBU digital audio<br />
interfacest<strong>and</strong>ard,<strong>and</strong>isrecordedonaseparate<br />
track. The basic structure of the time data<br />
is based on the BCD system. Tables 8.20 <strong>and</strong><br />
8.21 list the LTC bit assignments <strong>and</strong> arrangement.<br />
Note the 24-hour clock system is used.<br />
LTC Timing<br />
The modulation technique is such that a transition<br />
occurs at the beginning of every bit<br />
period. “1” is represented by a second transition<br />
one-half a bit period from the start of the<br />
bit. “0” is represented when there is no transition<br />
within the bit period (see Figure 8.49).
VBI Data 327<br />
Bit(s) Function Note Bit(s) Function Note<br />
0–3 units of frames 58 flag 5 note 5<br />
4–7 user group 1 59 flag 6 note 6<br />
8–9 tens of frames 60–63 user group 8<br />
10 flag 1 note 1 64 sync bit fixed”0”<br />
11 flag 2 note 2 65 sync bit fixed”0”<br />
12–15 user group 2 66 sync bit fixed”1”<br />
16–19 units of seconds 67 sync bit fixed”1”<br />
20–23 user group 3 68 sync bit fixed”1”<br />
24–26 tens of seconds 69 sync bit fixed”1”<br />
27 flag 3 note 3 70 sync bit fixed”1”<br />
28–31 user group 4 71 sync bit fixed”1”<br />
32–35 units of minutes 72 sync bit fixed”1”<br />
36–39 user group 5 73 sync bit fixed”1”<br />
40–42 tens of minutes 74 sync bit fixed”1”<br />
43 flag 4 note 4 75 sync bit fixed”1”<br />
44–47 user group 6 76 sync bit fixed”1”<br />
48–51 units of hours 77 sync bit fixed”1”<br />
52–55 user group 7 78 sync bit fixed”0”<br />
56–57 tens of hours 79 sync bit fixed”1”<br />
Notes<br />
1. Drop frame flag. 525/60 <strong>and</strong> 1125/60 systems: “1” if frame numbers are being dropped, “0” if no frame dropping<br />
is done. 625/50 systems: “0”.<br />
2. Color frame flag. 525/60 systems: “1” if even units of frame numbers identify fields 1 <strong>and</strong> 2 <strong>and</strong> odd units of field<br />
numbers identify fields 3 <strong>and</strong> 4. 625/50 systems: “1” if timecode is locked to the video signal in accordance<br />
with 8-field sequence <strong>and</strong> the video signal has the “preferred subcarrier-to-line-sync phase”. 1125/60 systems:<br />
“0”.<br />
3. 525/60 <strong>and</strong> 1125/60 systems: Phase correction. This bit shall be put in a state so that every 80-bit word contains<br />
an even number of “0”s. 625/50 systems: Binary group flag 0.<br />
4. 525/60 <strong>and</strong> 1125/60 systems: Binary group flag 0. 625/50 systems: Binary group flag 2.<br />
5. Binary group flag 1.<br />
6. 525/60 <strong>and</strong> 1125/60 systems: Binary group flag 2. 625/50 systems: Phase correction. This bit shall be put in a<br />
state so that every 80-bit word contains an even number of “0”s.<br />
Table 8.20. LTC Bit Assignments.
328 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Frames (count 0–29 for 525/60 systems, 0–24 for 625/50 systems)<br />
units of frames (bits 0–3) 4-bit BCD (count 0–9); bit 0 is LSB<br />
tens of frames (bits 8–9) 2-bit BCD (count 0–2); bit 8 is LSB<br />
units of seconds (bits 16–19)<br />
Seconds<br />
4-bit BCD (count 0–9); bit 16 is LSB<br />
tens of seconds (bits 24–26) 3-bit BCD (count 0–5); bit 24 is LSB<br />
units of minutes (bits 32–35)<br />
Minutes<br />
4-bit BCD (count 0–9); bit 32 is LSB<br />
tens of minutes (bits 40–42) 3-bit BCD (count 0–5); bit 40 is LSB<br />
units of hours (bits 48–51)<br />
Hours<br />
4-bit BCD (count 0–9); bit 48 is LSB<br />
tens of hours (bits 56–57) 2-bit BCD (count 0–2); bit 56 is LSB<br />
Table 8.21. LTC Bit Arrangement.<br />
"0" "1"<br />
Figure 8.49. LTC Data Bit Transition Format.
The signal has a peak-to-peak amplitude of 0.5–<br />
4.5V, with rise <strong>and</strong> fall times of 40 ±10 µs (10%<br />
to 90% amplitude points).<br />
Becausetheentireframetimeisusedto<br />
generate the 80-bit LTC information, the bit<br />
rate (in bits per second) may be determined<br />
by:<br />
FC =80FV where FV istheverticalframerateinframes<br />
persecond.The80bitsoftimecodeinformation<br />
are output serially, with bit 0 being first.<br />
The LTC word occupies the entire frame time,<br />
<strong>and</strong> the data must be evenly spaced throughout<br />
this time. The start of the LTC word occurs<br />
at the beginning of line 5 ±1.5 lines for 525/60<br />
systems, at the beginning of line 2 ±1.5 lines<br />
for 625/50 systems, <strong>and</strong> at the vertical sync<br />
timing reference of the frame ±1 line for 1125/<br />
60 systems.<br />
Vertical Inter val Time Code (VITC)<br />
The VITC is recorded during the vertical<br />
blanking interval of the video signal in both<br />
fields. Since it is recorded with the video, it can<br />
be read in still mode. However, it cannot be rerecorded<br />
(or restriped). Restriping requires<br />
dubbing down a generation, deleting <strong>and</strong><br />
inserting a new time code. For YPbPr <strong>and</strong> Svideo<br />
interfaces, VITC is present on the Y signal.<br />
For analog RGB interfaces, VITC is<br />
present on all three signals.<br />
As with the LTC, the basic structure of the<br />
time data is based on the BCD system. Tables<br />
8.22 <strong>and</strong> 8.23 list the VITC bit assignments <strong>and</strong><br />
arrangement. Note the 24-hour clock system is<br />
used.<br />
VITC Cyclic Redundancy Check<br />
Eight bits (82–89) are reserved for the code<br />
word for error detection by means of cyclic<br />
redundancy checking. The generating polyno-<br />
VBI Data 329<br />
mial, x 8 + 1, applies to all bits from 0 to 81,<br />
inclusive. Figure 8.50 illustrates implementing<br />
the polynomial using a shift register. During<br />
passage of timecode data, the multiplexer is in<br />
position 0 <strong>and</strong> the data is output while the CRC<br />
calculation is done simultaneously by the shift<br />
register. After all the timecode data has been<br />
output, the shift register contains the CRC<br />
value, <strong>and</strong> switching the multiplexer to position<br />
1 enables the CRC value to be output.<br />
When the process is repeated on decoding, the<br />
shift register should contain all zeros if no<br />
errors exist.<br />
VITC Timing<br />
The modulation technique is such that each<br />
state corresponds to a binary state, <strong>and</strong> a transition<br />
occurs only when there is a change in<br />
the data between adjacent bits from a “1” to “0”<br />
or “0” to “1”. No transitions occur when adjacent<br />
bits contain the same data. This is commonly<br />
referred to as “non-return to zero”<br />
(NRZ). Synchronization bit pairs are inserted<br />
throughout the VITC data to assist the receiver<br />
in maintaining the correct frequency lock.<br />
The bit rate (F C )isdefinedtobe:<br />
F C = 115 F H ± 2%<br />
where F H is the horizontal line frequency. The<br />
90 bits of time code information are output<br />
serially, with bit 0 being first. For 625/50 systems,<br />
lines 19 <strong>and</strong> 332 are commonly used for<br />
the VITC. For 525/60 systems, lines 14 <strong>and</strong><br />
277 are commonly used. To protect the VITC<br />
against drop-outs, it may also be present two<br />
scan lines later, although any two nonconsecutive<br />
scan lines per field may be used.<br />
Figure 8.51 illustrates the timing of the<br />
VITC data on the scan line. The data must be<br />
evenly spaced throughout the VITC word. The<br />
10% to 90% rise <strong>and</strong> fall times of the VITC bit<br />
data should be 200 ±50 ns (525/60 <strong>and</strong> 625/50
330 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Bit(s) Function Note Bit(s) Function Note<br />
0 sync bit fixed “1” 42–45 units of minutes<br />
1 sync bit fixed “0” 46–49 user group 5<br />
2–5 units of frames 50 sync bit fixed “1”<br />
6–9 usergroup1 51 syncbit fixed“0”<br />
10 sync bit fixed “1” 52–54 tens of minutes<br />
11 sync bit fixed “0” 55 flag 4 note 4<br />
12–13 tens of frames 56–59 user group 6<br />
14 flag 1 note 1 60 sync bit fixed “1”<br />
15 flag 2 note 2 61 sync bit fixed”0”<br />
16–19 user group 2 62–65 units of hours<br />
20 sync bit fixed “1” 66–69 user group 7<br />
21 sync bit fixed “0” 70 sync bit fixed”1”<br />
22–25 units of seconds 71 sync bit fixed”0”<br />
26–29 user group 3 72–73 tens of hours<br />
30 sync bit fixed “1” 74 flag 5 note 5<br />
31 sync bit fixed “0” 75 flag 6 note 6<br />
32–34 tens of seconds 76–79 user group 8<br />
35 flag 3 note 3 80 sync bit fixed”1”<br />
36–39 user group 4 81 sync bit fixed”0”<br />
40 sync bit fixed “1” 82–89 CRC group<br />
41 sync bit fixed “0”<br />
Notes<br />
1. Drop frame flag. 525/60 <strong>and</strong> 1125/60 systems: “1” if frame numbers are being dropped, “0” if no frame<br />
dropping is done. 625/50 systems: “0”.<br />
2. Color frame flag. 525/60 systems: “1” if even units of frame numbers identify fields 1 <strong>and</strong> 2 <strong>and</strong> odd units<br />
of field numbers identify fields 3 <strong>and</strong> 4. 625/50 systems: “1” if timecode is locked to the video signal in<br />
accordance with 8-field sequence <strong>and</strong> the video signal has the “preferred subcarrier-to-line-sync<br />
phase”. 1125/60 systems: “0”.<br />
3. 525/60 systems: Field flag. “0” during fields 1 <strong>and</strong> 3, “1” during fields 2 <strong>and</strong> 4. 625/50 systems: Binary<br />
group flag 0. 1125/60 systems: Field flag. “0” during field 1, “1” during field 2.<br />
4. 525/60 <strong>and</strong> 1125/60 systems: Binary group flag 0. 625/50 systems: Binary group flag 2.<br />
5. Binary group flag 1.<br />
6. 525/60 <strong>and</strong> 1125/60 systems: Binary group flag 2. 625/50 systems: Field flag. “0” during fields 1, 3, 5, <strong>and</strong><br />
7, “1” during fields 2, 4, 6, <strong>and</strong> 8.<br />
Table 8.22. VITC Bit Assignments.
Frames (count 0–29 for 525/60 systems, 0–24 for 625/50 systems)<br />
units of frames (bits 2–5) 4-bit BCD (count 0–9); bit 2 is LSB<br />
tens of frames (bits 12–13) 2-bit BCD (count 0–2); bit 12 is LSB<br />
units of seconds (bits 22–25)<br />
Seconds<br />
4-bit BCD (count 0–9); bit 22 is LSB<br />
tens of seconds (bits 32–34) 3-bit BCD (count 0–5); bit 32 is LSB<br />
units of minutes (bits 42–45)<br />
Minutes<br />
4-bit BCD (count 0–9); bit 42 is LSB<br />
tens of minutes (bits 52–54) 3-bit BCD (count 0–5); bit 52 is LSB<br />
units of hours (bits 62–65)<br />
Hours<br />
4-bit BCD (count 0–9); bit 62 is LSB<br />
tens of hours (bits 72–73) 2-bit BCD (count 0–2); bit 72 is LSB<br />
DATA<br />
IN<br />
XOR<br />
Table 8.23. VITC Bit Arrangement.<br />
D Q D Q D Q D Q D Q D Q D Q D Q<br />
Figure 8.50. VITC CRC Generation.<br />
0<br />
1<br />
MUX<br />
VBI Data 331<br />
DATA<br />
+<br />
CRC<br />
OUT
332 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
10 µS MIN<br />
(19 BITS)<br />
80 ±10<br />
IRE<br />
63.556 µS (115 BITS)<br />
50.286 µS (90 BITS)<br />
525 / 60 SYSTEMS<br />
2.1 µS MIN<br />
HSYNC HSYNC<br />
11.2 µS MIN<br />
(21 BITS)<br />
78 ±7<br />
IRE<br />
64 µS (115 BITS)<br />
49.655 µS (90 BITS)<br />
625 / 50 SYSTEMS<br />
1.9 µS MIN<br />
HSYNC HSYNC<br />
2.7 µS MIN<br />
(10.5 BITS)<br />
78 ±7<br />
IRE<br />
29.63 µS (115 BITS)<br />
23.18 µS (90 BITS)<br />
1125 / 60 SYSTEMS<br />
1.5 µS<br />
MIN<br />
HSYNC HSYNC<br />
Figure 8.51. VITC Position <strong>and</strong> Timing.
User Bits Content<br />
Timecode Referenced<br />
to External Clock<br />
BGF2 BGF1 BGF0<br />
user defined no 0 0 0<br />
8-bit character set1 no 0 0 1<br />
user defined yes 0 1 0<br />
reser ved unassigned 0 1 1<br />
date <strong>and</strong> time zone3 no 1 0 0<br />
page / line2 no 1 0 1<br />
date <strong>and</strong> time zone3 yes 1 1 0<br />
page / line2 yes 1 1 1<br />
1 Conforming to ISO/IEC 646 or 2022.<br />
2 Described in SMPTE 262M.<br />
3 Described in SMPTE 309M. See Tables 8.25 through 8.27.<br />
Table 8.24. LTC <strong>and</strong> VITC Binary Group Flag (BGF) Bit Definitions.<br />
USER<br />
GROUPS<br />
7–BIT ISO:<br />
8–BIT ISO:<br />
1<br />
3<br />
5<br />
7<br />
B1 B2 B3 B4<br />
A1 A2 A3 A4<br />
2<br />
4<br />
6<br />
8<br />
ONE ISO CHARACTER<br />
B5 B6 B7 0<br />
A5 A6 A7 A8<br />
Figure 8.52. Use of Binary Groups to Describe<br />
ISO Characters Coded With 7 or 8 Bits.<br />
VBI Data 333
334 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
MJD flag: “0” = YYMMDD format, “1” =MJDformat.<br />
systems) or 100 ±25 ns (1125/60 systems)<br />
before adding it to the video signal to avoid<br />
possible distortion of the VITC signal by downstream<br />
chrominance circuits. In most circumstances,<br />
the analog lowpass filters after the<br />
video D/A converters should suffice for the filtering.<br />
User Bits<br />
The binary group flag (BGF) bits shown in<br />
Table 8.24 specify the content of the 32 user<br />
bits. The 32 user bits are organized as eight<br />
groups of four bits each.<br />
User Group 8 User Group 7<br />
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0<br />
MJD Flag 0 time zone offset code 00 H –3F H<br />
Table 8.25. Date <strong>and</strong> Time Zone Format Coding.<br />
User<br />
Group<br />
Assignment Value Description<br />
1 D 0–9 day units<br />
2 D 0–3 day units<br />
3 M 0–9 month units<br />
4 M 0, 1 month units<br />
5 Y 0–9 yearunits<br />
6 Y 0–9 yearunits<br />
Table 8.26. YYMMDD Date Format.<br />
The user bits are intended for storage of<br />
data by users. The 32 bits may be assigned in<br />
any manner without restriction, if indicated as<br />
user-defined by the binary group flags.<br />
If an 8-bit character set conforming to<br />
ISO/IEC 646 or 2022 is indicated by the binary<br />
group flags, the characters are to be inserted<br />
asshowninFigure8.52.Notethatsomeuser<br />
bits will be decoded before the binary group<br />
flags are decoded; therefore, the decoder must<br />
store the early user data before any processing<br />
is done.
Code Hours Code Hours Code Hours<br />
00 UTC 16 UTC + 10.00 2C UTC + 09.30<br />
01 UTC – 01.00 17 UTC + 09.00 2D UTC + 08.30<br />
02 UTC – 02.00 18 UTC + 08.00 2E UTC + 07.30<br />
03 UTC – 03.00 19 UTC + 07.00 2F UTC + 06.30<br />
04 UTC – 04.00 1A UTC – 06.30 30 TP–1<br />
05 UTC – 05.00 1B UTC – 07.30 31 TP–0<br />
06 UTC – 06.00 1C UTC – 08.30 32 UTC + 12.45<br />
07 UTC – 07.00 1D UTC – 09.30 33 reserved<br />
08 UTC – 08.00 1E UTC – 10.30 34 reserved<br />
09 UTC – 09.00 1F UTC – 11.30 35 reserved<br />
0A UTC – 00.30 20 UTC + 06.00 36 reserved<br />
0B UTC – 01.30 21 UTC + 05.00 37 reserved<br />
0C UTC – 02.30 22 UTC + 04.00 38 user defined<br />
0D UTC – 03.30 23 UTC + 03.00 39 unknown<br />
0E UTC – 04.30 24 UTC + 02.00 3A UTC + 05.30<br />
0F UTC – 05.30 25 UTC + 01.00 3B UTC + 04.30<br />
10 UTC – 10.00 26 reserved 3C UTC + 03.30<br />
11 UTC – 11.00 27 reserved 3D UTC + 02.30<br />
12 UTC – 12.00 28 TP–3 3E UTC + 01.30<br />
13 UTC + 13.00 29 TP–2 3F UTC + 00.30<br />
14 UTC + 12.00 2A UTC + 11.30<br />
15 UTC + 11.00 2B UTC + 10.30<br />
Table 8.27. Time Zone Offset Codes.<br />
VBI Data 335
336 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
When the user groups are used to transfer<br />
time zone <strong>and</strong> date information, user groups 7<br />
<strong>and</strong>8specifythetimezone<strong>and</strong>theformatof<br />
thedateintheremainingsixusergroups,as<br />
showninTables8.25<strong>and</strong>8.27.Thedatemay<br />
be either a six-digit YYMMDD format (Table<br />
8.26) or a six-digit modified Julian date (MJD),<br />
as indicated by the MJD flag.<br />
Closed Captioning<br />
This section reviews closed captioning for the<br />
hearing impaired in the United States. Closed<br />
captioning<strong>and</strong>textaretransmittedduringthe<br />
blanked active line-time portion of lines 21 <strong>and</strong><br />
284.<br />
Extended data services (XDS) also may be<br />
transmitted during the blanked active line-time<br />
BLANK LEVEL<br />
SYNC LEVEL<br />
50 ±2 IRE<br />
40 IRE<br />
10.5 ± 0.25 µS<br />
3.58 MHZ<br />
COLOR BURST<br />
(9 CYCLES)<br />
10.003 ± 0.25 µS<br />
12.91 µS<br />
7 CYCLES<br />
OF 0.5035 MHZ<br />
(CLOCK RUN–IN)<br />
portion of line 284. XDS may indicate the program<br />
name, time into the show, time remainingtotheend,<strong>and</strong>soon.<br />
Note that due to editing before transmission,<br />
it may be possible that the caption information<br />
is moved down a scan line or two.<br />
Therefore, caption decoders should monitor<br />
more than just lines 21 <strong>and</strong> 284 for caption<br />
information.<br />
Waveform<br />
The data format for both lines consists of a<br />
clockrun-insignal,astartbit,<strong>and</strong>two7-bit<br />
plus parity words of ASCII data (per X3.4-<br />
1967). For YPbPr <strong>and</strong> S-video interfaces, captioning<br />
is present on the Y signal. For analog<br />
RGB interfaces, captioning is present on all<br />
three signals.<br />
TWO 7–BIT + PARITY<br />
ASCII CHARACTERS<br />
(DATA)<br />
27.382 µS 33.764 µS<br />
S<br />
T<br />
A<br />
R<br />
T<br />
D0–D6 P D0–D6<br />
A<br />
R<br />
I<br />
T<br />
Y<br />
Figure 8.53. <strong>NTSC</strong> Line 21 <strong>and</strong> Line 284 Closed Captioning Timing.<br />
P<br />
A<br />
R<br />
I<br />
T<br />
Y<br />
240–288 NS<br />
RISE / FALL<br />
TIMES<br />
(2T BAR<br />
SHAPING)
Figure 8.53 illustrates the waveform <strong>and</strong><br />
timing for transmitting the closed captioning<br />
<strong>and</strong>XDSinformation<strong>and</strong>conformstotheTelevision<br />
Synchronizing Waveform for Color<br />
Transmission in Subpart E, Part 73 of the FCC<br />
Rules <strong>and</strong> Regulations <strong>and</strong> EIA-608. The clock<br />
run-in is a 7-cycle sinusoidal burst that is frequency-locked<br />
<strong>and</strong> phase-locked to the caption<br />
data <strong>and</strong> is used to provide synchronization for<br />
the decoder. The nominal data rate is 32× F H .<br />
However, decoders should not rely on this timing<br />
relationship due to possible horizontal timing<br />
variations introduced by video processing<br />
circuitry <strong>and</strong> VCRs. After the clock run-in signal,<br />
the blanking level is maintained for a two<br />
data bit duration, followed by a “1” start bit.<br />
The start bit is followed by 16 bits of data, composed<br />
of two 7-bit + odd parity ASCII characters.<br />
Caption data is transmitted using a non–<br />
return-to-zero (NRZ) code; a “1” corresponds<br />
to the 50 ± 2IRElevel<strong>and</strong>a“0” corresponds to<br />
the blanking level (0–2 IRE). The negativegoing<br />
crossings of the clock are coherent with<br />
the data bit transitions.<br />
Typical decoders specify the time between<br />
the 50% points of sync <strong>and</strong> clock run-in to be<br />
10.5 ±0.5 µs, with a ±3% tolerance on F H ,50±12<br />
IRE for a “1” bit, <strong>and</strong> –2 to+12IREfora“0” bit.<br />
Decoders must also h<strong>and</strong>le bit rise/fall times<br />
of 240–480 ns.<br />
NUL characters (00 H ) should be sent<br />
when no display or control characters are<br />
being transmitted. This, in combination with<br />
the clock run-in, enables the decoder to determine<br />
whether captioning or text transmission<br />
is being implemented.<br />
If using only line 21, the clock run-in <strong>and</strong><br />
data do not need to be present on line 284.<br />
However, if using only line 284, the clock runin<br />
<strong>and</strong> data should be present on both lines 21<br />
<strong>and</strong> 284; data for line 21 would consist of NUL<br />
characters.<br />
VBI Data 337<br />
At the decoder, as shown in Figure 8.54,<br />
the display area of a 525-line 4:3 interlaced display<br />
is typically 15 rows high <strong>and</strong> 34 columns<br />
wide. The vertical display area begins on lines<br />
43 <strong>and</strong> 306 <strong>and</strong> ends on lines 237 <strong>and</strong> 500. The<br />
horizontal display area begins 13 µs <strong>and</strong>ends<br />
58 µs, after the leading edge of horizontal sync.<br />
In text mode, all rows are used to display<br />
text; each row contains a maximum of 32 characters,<br />
with at least a one-column wide space<br />
on the left <strong>and</strong> right of the text. The only transparent<br />
area is around the outside of the text<br />
area.<br />
In caption mode, text usually appears only<br />
on rows 1–4 or12–15; the remaining rows are<br />
usually transparent. Each row contains a maximum<br />
of 32 characters, with at least a one-column<br />
wide space on the left <strong>and</strong> right of the<br />
text.<br />
Some caption decoders support up to 48<br />
columns per row, <strong>and</strong> up to 16 rows, allowing<br />
some customization for the display of caption<br />
data.<br />
Basic Ser vices<br />
There are two types of display formats: text<br />
<strong>and</strong> captioning. In underst<strong>and</strong>ing the operation<br />
of the decoder, it is easier to visualize an invisible<br />
cursor that marks the position where the<br />
next character will be displayed. Note that if<br />
you are designing a decoder, you should obtain<br />
the latest FCC Rules <strong>and</strong> Regulations <strong>and</strong> EIA-<br />
608 to ensure correct operation, as this section<br />
is only a summary.<br />
Text Mode<br />
Text mode uses 7–15 rows of the display <strong>and</strong> is<br />
enabled upon receipt of the Resume Text Display<br />
or Text Restart code. When text mode has<br />
been selected, <strong>and</strong> the text memory is empty,<br />
the cursor starts at the top-most row, character<br />
1 position. Once all the rows of text are displayed,<br />
scrolling is enabled.
338 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
With each carriage return received, the<br />
top-most row of text is erased, the text is rolled<br />
up one row (over a maximum time of 0.433 seconds),<br />
the bottom row is erased, <strong>and</strong> the cursor<br />
is moved to the bottom row, character 1<br />
position. If new text is received while scrolling,<br />
it is seen scrolling up from the bottom of the<br />
display area. If a carriage return is received<br />
while scrolling, the rows are immediately<br />
moved up one row to their final position.<br />
Once the cursor moves to the character 32<br />
position on any row, any text received before a<br />
carriage return, preamble address code, or<br />
backspace will be displayed at the character 32<br />
position, replacing any previous character at<br />
that position. The Text Restart comm<strong>and</strong><br />
erases all characters on the display <strong>and</strong> moves<br />
the cursor to the top row, character 1 position.<br />
LINE COUNT<br />
LINE 43<br />
56<br />
69<br />
82<br />
95<br />
108<br />
121<br />
134<br />
147<br />
160<br />
173<br />
186<br />
199<br />
212<br />
225<br />
237<br />
45.02 µS (34 CHARACTERS)<br />
ROW 1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
7<br />
8<br />
9<br />
10<br />
11<br />
12<br />
13<br />
14<br />
15<br />
Figure 8.54. Closed Captioning Display Format.<br />
Captioning Mode<br />
Captioning has several modes available, including<br />
roll-up, pop-on, <strong>and</strong> paint-on.<br />
Roll-up captioning is enabled by receiving<br />
one of the miscellaneous control codes to<br />
select the number of rows displayed. “Roll-up<br />
captions, 2 rows” enables rows 14 <strong>and</strong> 15; “rollup<br />
captions, 3 rows” enables rows 13–15, “rollup<br />
captions, 4 rows” enables rows 12–15.<br />
Regardless of the number of rows enabled, the<br />
cursor remains on row 15. Once row 15 is full,<br />
the rows are scrolled up one row (at the rate of<br />
one dot per frame), <strong>and</strong> the cursor is moved<br />
back to row 15, character 1.<br />
Pop-on captioning may use rows 1–4or12–<br />
15, <strong>and</strong> is initiated by the Resume Caption<br />
Loading comm<strong>and</strong>. The display memory is<br />
essentially double-buffered. While memory<br />
buffer 1 is displayed, memory buffer 2 is being<br />
loaded with caption data. At the receipt of a<br />
CAPTIONS<br />
OR<br />
INFOTEXT<br />
INFOTEXT<br />
ONLY<br />
CAPTIONS<br />
OR<br />
INFOTEXT
End of Caption code, memory buffer 2 is displayed<br />
while memory buffer 1 is being loaded<br />
with new caption data.<br />
Paint-on captioning, enabled by the<br />
Resume Direct Captioning comm<strong>and</strong>, is similar<br />
to Pop-on captioning, but no double-buffering<br />
is used; caption data is loaded directly into<br />
display memory.<br />
Three types of control codes (preamble<br />
address codes, midrow codes, <strong>and</strong> miscellaneous<br />
control codes) are used to specify the<br />
format, location, <strong>and</strong> attributes of the characters.<br />
Each control code consists of two bytes,<br />
transmitted together on line 21 or line 284. On<br />
line 21, they are normally transmitted twice in<br />
succession to help ensure correct reception.<br />
They are not transmitted twice on line 284 to<br />
minimize b<strong>and</strong>width used for captioning.<br />
The first byte is a nondisplay control byte<br />
with a range of 10 H to 1F H ; the second byte is a<br />
display control byte in the range of 20 H to 7F H .<br />
At the beginning of each row, a control code is<br />
sent to initialize the row. Caption roll-up <strong>and</strong><br />
text modes allow either a preamble address<br />
START<br />
BIT<br />
PREAMBLE CONTROL CODE<br />
(TRANSMITTED TWICE)<br />
NON-DISPLAY<br />
CONTROL<br />
CHARACTER<br />
(7 BITS<br />
LSB FIRST)<br />
ODD<br />
PARITY<br />
BIT<br />
DISPLAY<br />
CONTROL<br />
CHARACTER<br />
(7 BITS<br />
LSB FIRST)<br />
IDENTIFICATION CODE, ROW POSITION, INDENT,<br />
AND DISPLAY CONDITION INSTRUCTIONS<br />
ODD<br />
PARITY<br />
BIT<br />
START<br />
BIT<br />
CAPTION TEXT UP TO 32<br />
CHARACTERS PER ROW<br />
FIRST<br />
TEXT<br />
CHARACTER<br />
(7 BITS<br />
LSB FIRST)<br />
ODD<br />
PARITY<br />
BIT<br />
SECOND<br />
TEXT<br />
CHARACTER<br />
(7 BITS<br />
LSB FIRST)<br />
BEGINNING OF DISPLAYED<br />
CAPTION<br />
VBI Data 339<br />
code or midrow control code at the start of a<br />
row; the other caption modes use a preamble<br />
address code to initialize a row. The preamble<br />
address codes are illustrated in Figure 8.55<br />
<strong>and</strong> Table 8.28.<br />
The midrow codes are typically used<br />
within a row to change the color, italics, underline,<br />
<strong>and</strong> flashing attributes <strong>and</strong> should occur<br />
only between words. Color, italics, <strong>and</strong> underline<br />
are controlled by the preamble address<br />
<strong>and</strong> midrow codes; flash on is controlled by a<br />
miscellaneous control code. An attribute<br />
remains in effect until another control code is<br />
received or the end of row is reached. Each<br />
row starts with a control code to set the color<br />
<strong>and</strong> underline attributes (white nonunderlined<br />
is the default if no control code is received<br />
before the first character on an empty row).<br />
The color attribute can be changed only by the<br />
midrow code of another color; the italics<br />
attribute does not change the color attribute.<br />
However, a color attribute turns off the italics<br />
attribute. The flash on comm<strong>and</strong> does not alter<br />
the status of the color, italics, or underline<br />
Figure 8.55. Closed Captioning Preamble Address Code Format.<br />
ODD<br />
PARITY<br />
BIT
340 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Non-display Control Byte Display Control Byte<br />
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0<br />
0 0 1 CH<br />
0 0 1<br />
0 1 0<br />
1 0 1<br />
1 1 0<br />
U: “0” = no underline, “1” = underline<br />
CH: “0” = data channel 1, “1” = data channel 2<br />
Row Position<br />
1 0<br />
1<br />
1 1 2<br />
1 0 3<br />
1 1 4<br />
1 0 5<br />
1 1 6<br />
1 0 7<br />
1 1 A B C D U<br />
8<br />
1 1 1<br />
1<br />
1<br />
0<br />
1<br />
9<br />
10<br />
0 0 0 1 0 11<br />
0 1 1<br />
1 0 0<br />
1 0 12<br />
1 1 13<br />
1 0 14<br />
1 1 15<br />
A B C D Attribute<br />
0 0 0 0 white<br />
0 0 0 1 green<br />
0 0 1 0 blue<br />
0 0 1 1 cyan<br />
0 1 0 0 red<br />
0 1 0 1 yellow<br />
0 1 1 0 magenta<br />
0 1 1 1 italics<br />
1 0 0 0 indent0,white<br />
1 0 0 1 indent4,white<br />
1 0 1 0 indent8,white<br />
1 0 1 1 indent 12, white<br />
1 1 0 0 indent 16, white<br />
1 1 0 1 indent 20, white<br />
1 1 1 0 indent 24, white<br />
1 1 1 1 indent 28, white<br />
Table 8.28. Closed Captioning Preamble Address Codes. In text mode, the indent codes<br />
may be used to perform indentation; in this instance, the row information is ignored.
attributes. However, a color or italics midrow<br />
control code turns off the flash. Note that the<br />
underline color is the same color as the character<br />
being underlined; the underline resides on<br />
dot row 11 <strong>and</strong> covers the entire width of the<br />
character column.<br />
Table 8.29, Figure 8.56, <strong>and</strong> Table 8.30<br />
illustrate the midrow <strong>and</strong> miscellaneous control<br />
code operation. For example, if it were the<br />
end of a caption, the control code could be End<br />
ofCaption(transmittedtwice).Itcouldbefollowed<br />
by a preamble address code (transmitted<br />
twice) to start another line of captioning.<br />
Characters are displayed using a dot<br />
matrix format. Each character cell is typically<br />
16 samples wide <strong>and</strong> 26 samples high (16×26),<br />
as shown in Figure 8.57. Dot rows 2–19 are<br />
usually used for actual character outlines. Dot<br />
rows 0, 1, 20, 21, 24, <strong>and</strong> 25 are usually blanked<br />
to provide vertical spacing between characters,<br />
<strong>and</strong> underlining is typically done on dot rows<br />
VBI Data 341<br />
22 <strong>and</strong> 23. Dot columns 0, 1, 14 <strong>and</strong> 15 are<br />
blanked to provide horizontal spacing between<br />
characters, except on dot rows 22 <strong>and</strong> 23 when<br />
the underline is displayed. This results in<br />
12×18 characters stored in character ROM.<br />
Table 8.31 shows the basic character set.<br />
Some caption decoders support multiple<br />
character sizes within the 16×26 region, including<br />
13×16, 13×24, 12×20, <strong>and</strong> 12×26. Not all<br />
combinations generate a sensible result due to<br />
the limited display area available.<br />
Optional Captioning Features<br />
Three sets of optional features are available for<br />
advanced captioning decoders.<br />
Optional Attributes<br />
Additional color choices are available for<br />
advanced captioning decoders, as shown in<br />
Table 8.32.<br />
Non-display Control Byte Display Control Byte<br />
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Attribute<br />
0 0 1 CH 0 0 1 0 1 0<br />
0 0 0<br />
white<br />
0 0 1 green<br />
0 1 0 blue<br />
0<br />
1<br />
1<br />
0<br />
1<br />
0<br />
U<br />
cyan<br />
red<br />
1 0 1 yellow<br />
1 1 0 magenta<br />
1 1 1 italics<br />
U: “0” = no underline, “1” = underline CH: “0” = data channel 1, “1” = data channel 2<br />
Note: Italics is implemented as a two-dot slant to the right over the vertical range of the character. Some decoders<br />
implement a one dot slant for every four scan lines. Underline resides on dot rows 22 <strong>and</strong> 23, <strong>and</strong> covers the<br />
entire column width.<br />
Table 8.29. Closed Captioning Midrow Codes.
342 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
START<br />
BIT<br />
TEXT<br />
CHARACTER<br />
(7 BITS<br />
LSB FIRST)<br />
TEXT MID–ROW CONTROL CODE<br />
(TRANSMITTED TWICE)<br />
ODD<br />
PARITY<br />
BIT<br />
TEXT<br />
CHARACTER<br />
(7 BITS<br />
LSB FIRST)<br />
ODD<br />
PARITY<br />
BIT<br />
START<br />
BIT<br />
NON-DISPLAY<br />
CONTROL<br />
CHARACTER<br />
(7 BITS<br />
LSB FIRST)<br />
ODD<br />
PARITY<br />
BIT<br />
DISPLAY<br />
CONTROL<br />
CHARACTER<br />
(7 BITS<br />
LSB FIRST)<br />
ODD<br />
PARITY<br />
BIT<br />
Figure 8.56. Closed Captioning Midrow Code Format. Miscellaneous control codes may also be<br />
transmitted in place of the midrow control code.<br />
Non-display Control Byte Display Control Byte<br />
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0<br />
0 0 1 CH 1 0 F 0 1 0<br />
0 0 1 CH 1 1 1 0 1 0<br />
CH: “0” = data channel 1, “1” = data channel 2 F: “0” = line 21, “1” = line 284<br />
Note: “flash on” blanks associated characters for 0.25 seconds once per second.<br />
Table 8.30. Closed Captioning Miscellaneous Control Codes.<br />
Comm<strong>and</strong><br />
0 0 0 0 resume caption loading<br />
0 0 0 1 backspace<br />
0 0 1 0 reserved<br />
0 0 1 1 reserved<br />
0 1 0 0 delete toendof row<br />
0 1 0 1 roll-up captions,2 rows<br />
0 1 1 0 roll-up captions,3 rows<br />
0 1 1 1 roll-up captions,4 rows<br />
1 0 0 0 flash on<br />
1 0 0 1 resume direct captioning<br />
1 0 1 0 textrestart<br />
1 0 1 1 resume text display<br />
1 1 0 0 erase displayedmemory<br />
1 1 0 1 carriage return<br />
1 1 1 0 erase nondisplayedmemory<br />
1 1 1 1 end of caption (flip memories)<br />
0 0 0 1 tab offset(1 column)<br />
0 0 1 0 taboffset(2 columns)<br />
0 0 1 1 taboffset(3 columns)
LINE 43<br />
LINE 306<br />
LINE 44<br />
LINE 307<br />
LINE 45<br />
LINE 308<br />
LINE 46<br />
LINE 309<br />
LINE 47<br />
LINE 310<br />
LINE 48<br />
LINE 311<br />
LINE 49<br />
LINE 312<br />
LINE 50<br />
LINE 313<br />
LINE 51<br />
LINE 314<br />
LINE 52<br />
LINE 315<br />
LINE 53<br />
LINE 316<br />
LINE 54<br />
LINE 317<br />
LINE 55<br />
LINE 318<br />
BLANK DOT<br />
CHARACTER DOT<br />
UNDERLINE<br />
Figure 8.57. Typical 16×26 Closed Captioning Character Cell Format for Row 1.<br />
DOT<br />
ROW<br />
0<br />
2<br />
4<br />
6<br />
8<br />
10<br />
12<br />
14<br />
16<br />
18<br />
20<br />
22<br />
24<br />
VBI Data 343
344 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Nondisplay Control Byte Display Control Byte Special<br />
Characters<br />
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0<br />
0 0 1 CH 0 0 1 0 1 1<br />
D6 D5 D4 D3<br />
0100<br />
0101<br />
0110<br />
0111<br />
1000<br />
0 0 0 0 ®<br />
0 0 0 1 °<br />
0 0 1 0 1/2<br />
0 0 1 1 ¿<br />
0 1 0 0 <br />
0 1 0 1 ¢<br />
0 1 1 0 £<br />
0 1 1 1 music note<br />
1 0 0 0 à<br />
1 0 0 1 transparentspace<br />
1 0 1 0 è<br />
1 0 1 1 â<br />
1 1 0 0 ê<br />
1 1 0 1 î<br />
1 1 1 0 ô<br />
1 1 1 1 û<br />
D2 D1 D0<br />
000 ( 0 8 @ H P X ú h p x<br />
001 ! ) 1 9 A I Q Y a i q y<br />
010 “ á 2 : B J R Z b j r z<br />
011 # + 3 ; C K S [ c k s ç<br />
100 $ , 4 < D L T é d l t ÷<br />
101 % – 5 = E M U ] e m u Ñ<br />
110 & . 6 > F N V í f n v ñ<br />
111 ‘ / 7 ? G O W ó g o w ■<br />
Table 8.31. Closed Captioning Basic Character Set.<br />
1001<br />
1010<br />
1011<br />
1100<br />
1101<br />
1110<br />
1111
Non-display Control Byte Display Control Byte<br />
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0<br />
T: “0” =opaque,“1” = semi-transparent CH: “0” = data channel 1, “1” = data channel 2<br />
Underline resides on dot rows 22 <strong>and</strong> 23, <strong>and</strong> covers the entire column width.<br />
Table 8.32. Closed Captioning Optional Attribute Codes.<br />
If a decoder doesn’t support semitransparent<br />
colors, the opaque colors may be used<br />
instead. If a specific background color isn’t<br />
supported by a decoder, it should default to the<br />
black background color. However, if the black<br />
foreground color is supported in a decoder, all<br />
the background colors should be implemented.<br />
A background attribute appears as a st<strong>and</strong>ard<br />
space on the display, <strong>and</strong> the attribute<br />
remains in effect until the end of the row or<br />
until another background attribute is received.<br />
The foreground attributes provide an<br />
eighth color (black) as a character color. As<br />
with midrow codes, a foreground attribute<br />
code turns off italics <strong>and</strong> blinking, <strong>and</strong> the<br />
least significant bit controls underlining.<br />
VBI Data 345<br />
Background<br />
Attribute<br />
0 0 0<br />
white<br />
0 0 1 green<br />
0 1 0 blue<br />
0 0 1 CH 0 0 0 0 1 0<br />
0<br />
1<br />
1<br />
0<br />
1<br />
0<br />
T<br />
cyan<br />
red<br />
1 0 1 yellow<br />
1 1 0 magenta<br />
1 1 1 black<br />
0 0 1 CH 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 transparent<br />
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0<br />
0 0 1 CH 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1<br />
Foreground<br />
Attribute<br />
0 black<br />
1 black underline<br />
Background <strong>and</strong> foreground attribute<br />
codes have an automatic backspace for backward<br />
compatibility with current decoders.<br />
Thus, an attribute must be preceded by a st<strong>and</strong>ard<br />
space character. St<strong>and</strong>ard decoders display<br />
the space <strong>and</strong> ignore the attribute.<br />
Extended decoders display the space, <strong>and</strong> on<br />
receiving the attribute, backspace, then display<br />
a space that changes the color <strong>and</strong> opacity.<br />
Thus, text formatting remains the same<br />
regardless of the type of decoder.<br />
Optional Closed Group Extensions<br />
To support custom features <strong>and</strong> characters not<br />
defined by the st<strong>and</strong>ards, the EIA/CEG maintains<br />
a set of code assignments requested by<br />
various caption providers <strong>and</strong> decoder manu-
346 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
facturers. These code assignments (currently<br />
used to select various character sets) are not<br />
compatible with caption decoders in the United<br />
States <strong>and</strong> videos using them should not be<br />
distributedintheU.S.market.<br />
Closed group extensions require two<br />
bytes. Table 8.33 lists the currently assigned<br />
closed group extensions to support captioning<br />
in the Asian languages.<br />
Optional Extended Characters<br />
An additional 64 accented characters (eight<br />
character sets of eight characters each) may<br />
be supported by decoders, permitting the display<br />
of other languages such as Spanish,<br />
French, Portuguese, German, Danish, Italian,<br />
Finnish, <strong>and</strong> Swedish. If supported, these<br />
accented characters are available in all caption<br />
<strong>and</strong> text modes.<br />
Non-display Control Byte Display Control Byte<br />
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0<br />
0 0 1 CH 1 1 1 0 1 0<br />
CH: “0” = data channel 1, “1” = data channel 2<br />
Each of the extended characters incorporates<br />
an automatic backspace for backward<br />
compatibility with current decoders. Thus, an<br />
extended character must be preceded by the<br />
st<strong>and</strong>ard ASCII version of the character. St<strong>and</strong>ard<br />
decoders display the ASCII character <strong>and</strong><br />
ignore the accented character. Extended<br />
decoders display the ASCII character, <strong>and</strong> on<br />
receiving the accented character, backspace,<br />
then display the accented character. Thus, text<br />
formatting remains the same regardless of the<br />
type of decoder.<br />
Extended characters require two bytes.<br />
The first byte is 12 H or 13 H for data channel<br />
one (1A H or 1B H for data channel two), followed<br />
by a value of 20 H –3F H .<br />
Table 8.33. Closed Captioning Optional Closed Group Extensions.<br />
Background<br />
Attribute<br />
0 1 0 0<br />
st<strong>and</strong>ard character<br />
set (normal size)<br />
0 1 0 1<br />
st<strong>and</strong>ard character<br />
set (double size)<br />
0 1 1 0<br />
first private<br />
character set<br />
0 1 1 1<br />
second private<br />
character set<br />
People’s Republic<br />
1 0 0 0 of China character<br />
set (GB 2312)<br />
Korean St<strong>and</strong>ard<br />
1 0 0 1<br />
character set<br />
(KSC 5601-1987)<br />
1 0 1 0 first registered character set
Extended Data Ser vices<br />
Line 284 may contain extended data service<br />
information, interleaved with the caption <strong>and</strong><br />
text information, as b<strong>and</strong>width is available. In<br />
this case, control codes are not transmitted<br />
twice, as they may be for the caption <strong>and</strong> text<br />
services.<br />
Information is transmitted as packets <strong>and</strong><br />
operates as a separate unique data channel.<br />
Data for each packet may or may not be contiguous<br />
<strong>and</strong> may be separated into subpackets<br />
that can be inserted anywhere space is available<br />
in the line 284 information stream.<br />
There are four types of extended data characters:<br />
Control: Control characters are used as a<br />
mode switch to enable the extended data<br />
mode. They are the first character of two <strong>and</strong><br />
have a value of 01 F to 0F H .<br />
Type: Type characters follow the control<br />
character (thus, they are the second character<br />
of two) <strong>and</strong> identify the packet type. They have<br />
a value of 01 F to 0F H .<br />
Checksum: Checksum characters always<br />
follow the “end of packet” control character.<br />
Thus, they are the second character of two <strong>and</strong><br />
have a value of 00 F to 7F H .<br />
Informational: These characters may be<br />
ASCII or non-ASCII data. They are transmitted<br />
in pairs up to <strong>and</strong> including 32 characters. A<br />
NUL character (00 H) is used to ensure pairs of<br />
characters are always sent.<br />
Control Characters<br />
Table8.34liststhecontrolcodes.Thecurrent<br />
class describes a program currently being<br />
transmitted. The future class describes a pro-<br />
VBI Data 347<br />
gram to be transmitted later. It contains the<br />
same information <strong>and</strong> formats as the current<br />
class. The channel class describes non-program-specific<br />
information about the channel.<br />
The miscellaneous class describes miscellaneous<br />
information. The public class transmits<br />
data or messages of a public service nature.<br />
The undefined class is used in proprietary systems<br />
for whatever that system wishes.<br />
Type Characters (Current, Future Class)<br />
Program Identification Number (01 H )<br />
This packet uses four characters to specify the<br />
program start time <strong>and</strong> date relative to Coordinated<br />
Universal Time (UTC). The format is<br />
shown in Table 8.35.<br />
Minutes have a range of 0–59. Hours have<br />
arangeof0–23. Dates have a range of 1–31.<br />
Months have a range of 1–12. “T” indicates if a<br />
program is routinely tape delayed for the<br />
Mountain <strong>and</strong> Pacific time zones. The “D,” “L,”<br />
<strong>and</strong> “Z” bits are ignored by the decoder.<br />
Program Length (02 H )<br />
This packet has 2, 4, or 6 characters <strong>and</strong> indicates<br />
the scheduled length of the program <strong>and</strong><br />
elapsed time for the program. The format is<br />
shown in Table 8.36.<br />
Minutes <strong>and</strong> seconds have a range of 0–59.<br />
Hours have a range of 0–63.<br />
Program Name (03 H )<br />
This packet contains 2–32 ASCII characters<br />
that specify the title of the program.<br />
Program Type (04 H )<br />
This packet contains 2–32 characters that specify<br />
the type of program. Each character is<br />
assigned a keyword, as shown in Table 8.37.
348 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Control<br />
Code<br />
01H 02H 03H 04H 05H 06H 07H 08H 09H 0AH 0BH 0CH 0DH 0EH Function Class<br />
start<br />
continue<br />
start<br />
continue<br />
start<br />
continue<br />
start<br />
continue<br />
start<br />
continue<br />
start<br />
continue<br />
start<br />
continue<br />
current<br />
future<br />
channel<br />
miscellaneous<br />
public service<br />
reserved<br />
undefined<br />
0F H end all<br />
Table 8.34. EIA-608 Control Codes.<br />
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Character<br />
1 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 m0 minute<br />
1 D h4 h3 h2 h1 h0 hour<br />
1 L d4 d3 d2 d1 d0 date<br />
1 Z T m3 m2 m1 m0 month<br />
Table 8.35. EIA-608 Program Identification Number Format.
Code<br />
(hex)<br />
20<br />
21<br />
22<br />
23<br />
24<br />
25<br />
26<br />
27<br />
28<br />
29<br />
2A<br />
2B<br />
2C<br />
2D<br />
2E<br />
2F<br />
50<br />
51<br />
52<br />
53<br />
54<br />
55<br />
56<br />
57<br />
58<br />
59<br />
5A<br />
5B<br />
5C<br />
5D<br />
5E<br />
5F<br />
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Character<br />
1 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 m0 length,minute<br />
1 h5 h4 h3 h2 h1 h0 length,hour<br />
1 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 m0 elapsed time,minute<br />
1 h5 h4 h3 h2 h1 h0 elapsed time,hour<br />
1 s5 s4 s3 s2 s1 s0 elapsed time,second<br />
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 null character<br />
Keyword<br />
education<br />
entertainment<br />
movie<br />
news<br />
religious<br />
sports<br />
other<br />
action<br />
advertisement<br />
animated<br />
anthology<br />
automobile<br />
awards<br />
baseball<br />
basketball<br />
bulletin<br />
hockey<br />
home<br />
horror<br />
information<br />
instruction<br />
international<br />
interview<br />
language<br />
legal<br />
live<br />
local<br />
math<br />
medical<br />
meeting<br />
military<br />
miniseries<br />
Table 8.36. EIA-608 Program Length Format.<br />
Code<br />
(hex)<br />
30<br />
31<br />
32<br />
33<br />
34<br />
35<br />
36<br />
37<br />
38<br />
39<br />
3A<br />
3B<br />
3C<br />
3D<br />
3E<br />
3F<br />
60<br />
61<br />
62<br />
63<br />
64<br />
65<br />
66<br />
67<br />
68<br />
69<br />
6A<br />
6B<br />
6C<br />
6D<br />
6E<br />
6F<br />
Keyword<br />
business<br />
classical<br />
college<br />
combat<br />
comedy<br />
commentary<br />
concert<br />
consumer<br />
contemporary<br />
crime<br />
dance<br />
documentary<br />
drama<br />
elementary<br />
erotica<br />
exercise<br />
music<br />
mystery<br />
national<br />
nature<br />
police<br />
politics<br />
premiere<br />
prerecorded<br />
product<br />
professional<br />
public<br />
racing<br />
reading<br />
repair<br />
repeat<br />
review<br />
Table 8.37. EIA-608 Program Types.<br />
Code<br />
(hex)<br />
40<br />
41<br />
42<br />
43<br />
44<br />
45<br />
46<br />
47<br />
48<br />
49<br />
4A<br />
4B<br />
4C<br />
4D<br />
4E<br />
4F<br />
70<br />
71<br />
72<br />
73<br />
74<br />
75<br />
76<br />
77<br />
78<br />
79<br />
7A<br />
7B<br />
7C<br />
7D<br />
7E<br />
7F<br />
VBI Data 349<br />
Keyword<br />
fantasy<br />
farm<br />
fashion<br />
fiction<br />
food<br />
football<br />
foreign<br />
fund raiser<br />
game/quiz<br />
garden<br />
golf<br />
government<br />
health<br />
high school<br />
history<br />
hobby<br />
romance<br />
science<br />
series<br />
service<br />
shopping<br />
soap opera<br />
special<br />
suspense<br />
talk<br />
technical<br />
tennis<br />
travel<br />
variety<br />
video<br />
weather<br />
western
350 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Program Rating (05 H )<br />
This packet, commonly referred to regarding<br />
the ”v” chip, contains the information shown in<br />
Table 8.38 to indicate the program rating.<br />
V indicates if violence is present. S indicates<br />
if sexual situations are present. L indicates<br />
if adult language is present. D indicates if<br />
sexually suggestive dialog is present.<br />
Program Audio Services (06 H )<br />
This packet contains two characters as shown<br />
in Table 8.39 to indicate the program audio services<br />
available.<br />
Program Caption Services (07 H )<br />
This packet contains 2–8 charactersasshown<br />
in Table 8.40 to indicate the program caption<br />
services available. L2–L0 are coded as shown<br />
in Table 8.39.<br />
Copy Generation Management System (08 H )<br />
This CGMS-A (Copy Generation Management<br />
System—Analog) packet contains 2 charactersasshowninTable8.41.<br />
InthecasewhereeitherB3orB4isa“0”,<br />
there is no Analog Protection System (B1 <strong>and</strong><br />
B2 are “0”). B0 is the analog source bit.<br />
Program Aspect Ratio (09 H )<br />
This packet contains two or four characters as<br />
shown in Table 8.42 to indicate the aspect ratio<br />
of the program.<br />
S0–S5 specify the first line containing<br />
active picture information. The value of S0–S5<br />
is calculated by subtracting 22 from the first<br />
line containing active picture information. The<br />
valid range for the first line containing active<br />
picture information is 22–85.<br />
E0–E5 specify the last line containing<br />
active picture information. The last line containing<br />
active video is calculated by subtracting<br />
the value of E0–E5 from 262. The valid range<br />
for the last line containing active picture information<br />
is 199–262.<br />
When this packet contains all zeros for<br />
both characters, or the packet is not detected,<br />
an aspect ratio of 4:3 is assumed.<br />
The Q0 bit specifies whether the video is<br />
squeezed (“1”) or normal (“0”). Squeezed<br />
video (anamorphic) is the result of compressing<br />
a 16:9 aspect ratio picture into a 4:3 aspect<br />
ratio picture without cropping side panels.<br />
The aspect ratio is calculated as follows:<br />
320 / (E – S) : 1<br />
Program Description (10 H –17 H )<br />
This packet contains 1–8 packet rows, with<br />
each packet row containing 0–32 ASCII characters.<br />
A packet row corresponds to a line of text<br />
on the display.<br />
Each packet is used in numerical<br />
sequence, <strong>and</strong> if a packet contains no ASCII<br />
characters, a blank line will be displayed.<br />
Type Characters (Channel Class)<br />
Network Name (01 H )<br />
This packet uses 2–32 ASCII characters to<br />
specify the network name.<br />
Network Call Letters (02 H )<br />
This packet uses four or six ASCII characters<br />
to specify the call letters of the channel. When<br />
six characters are used, they reflect the overthe-air<br />
channel number (2–69) assigned by the<br />
FCC. Single-digit channel numbers are preceded<br />
by a zero or a null character.<br />
Channel Tape Delay (03 H )<br />
This packet uses two characters to specify the<br />
number of hours <strong>and</strong> minutes the local station<br />
typically delays network programs. The format<br />
of this packet is shown in Table 8.43.
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Character<br />
1 D / a2 a1 a0 r2 r1 r0 MPAA movie rating<br />
1 V S L/ a3 g2 g1 g0 TV rating<br />
VBI Data 351<br />
r2–r0: Movie Rating g2–g0: USA TV Rating a3–a0: xxx0 MPAA movie rating<br />
000 not applicable 000 not rated LD01 USA TV rating<br />
001 G 001 TV-Y 0011 Canadian English TV rating<br />
010 PG 010 TV-Y7 0111 Canadian French TV rating<br />
011 PG-13 011 TV-G 1011 reserved<br />
100 R 100 TV-PG 1111 reserved<br />
101 NC-17 101 TV-14<br />
110 X 110 TV-MA<br />
111 not rated 111 not rated<br />
g2–g0: Canadian English TV Rating g2–g0: Canadian French TV Rating<br />
000 exempt 000 exempt<br />
001 C 001 G<br />
010 C8 + 010 8 ans +<br />
011 G 011 13 ans +<br />
100 PG 100 16 ans +<br />
101 14 + 101 18 ans +<br />
110 18 + 110 reserved<br />
111 reserved 111 reserved<br />
Table 8.38. EIA-608 <strong>and</strong> EIA-744 Program Rating Format.<br />
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Character<br />
1 L2 L1 L0 T2 T1 T0 main audio program<br />
1 L2 L1 L0 S2 S1 S0 secondaudio program (SAP)<br />
L2–L0: 000 unknown T2–T0: 000 unknown S2–S0: 000 unknown<br />
001 english 001 mono 001 mono<br />
010 spanish 010 simulated stereo 010 video descriptions<br />
011 french 011 true stereo 011 non-program audio<br />
100 german 100 stereo surround 100 special effects<br />
101 italian 101 data service 101 data service<br />
110 other 110 other 110 other<br />
111 none 111 none 111 none<br />
Table 8.39. EIA-608 Program Audio Services Format.
352 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Character<br />
1 L2 L1 L0 F C T service code<br />
FCT: 000 line 21, data channel 1 captioning<br />
001 line 21, data channel 1 text<br />
010 line 21, data channel 2 captioning<br />
011 line 21, data channel 2 text<br />
100 line 284, data channel 1 captioning<br />
101 line 284, data channel 1 text<br />
110 line 284, data channel 2 captioning<br />
111 line 284, data channel 2 text<br />
Table 8.40. EIA-608 Program Caption Services Format.<br />
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Character<br />
1 0 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 CGMS<br />
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 null<br />
B4–B3 CGMS–A Services:<br />
00 copying permitted without restriction<br />
01 condition not to be used<br />
10 one generation copy allowed<br />
11 no copying permitted<br />
B2–B1 Analog Protection Ser vices:<br />
00 no pseudo-sync pulse<br />
01 pseudo-sync pulse on; color striping off<br />
10 pseudo-sync pulse on; 2-line color striping on<br />
11 pseudo-sync pulse on; 4-line color striping on<br />
Table 8.41. EIA-608 <strong>and</strong> EIA IS–702 CGMS–A Format.
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Character<br />
1 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0 start<br />
1 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0 end<br />
1 – – – – – Q0 other<br />
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 null<br />
Table 8.42. EIA-608 Program Aspect Ratio Format.<br />
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Character<br />
1 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 m0 minute<br />
1 – h4 h3 h2 h1 h0 hour<br />
Table 8.43. EIA-608 Channel Tape Delay Format.<br />
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Character<br />
1 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 m0 minute<br />
1 D h4 h3 h2 h1 h0 hour<br />
1 L d4 d3 d2 d1 d0 date<br />
1 Z T m3 m2 m1 m0 month<br />
1 – – – D2 D1 D0 day<br />
1 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0 year<br />
Table 8.44. EIA-608 Time of Day Format.<br />
VBI Data 353
354 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Minutes have a range of 0–59. Hours have<br />
a range of 0–23. This delay applies to all programs<br />
on the channel that have the “T” bit set<br />
in their Program ID packet (Table 8.35).<br />
Type Characters (Miscellaneous Class)<br />
Time of Day (01 H )<br />
This packet uses six characters to specify the<br />
current time of day, month, <strong>and</strong> date relative to<br />
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The format<br />
is shown in Table 8.44.<br />
Minutes have a range of 0–59. Hours have<br />
a range of 0–23. Dates have a range of 1–31.<br />
Months have a range of 1–12. Days have a<br />
range of 1 (Sunday) to 7 (Saturday). Years<br />
have a range of 0–63 (added to 1990).<br />
“T” indicates if a program is routinely tape<br />
delayed for the Mountain <strong>and</strong> Pacific time<br />
zones. “D” indicates whether daylight savings<br />
time currently is being observed. “L” indicates<br />
whether the local day is February 28th or 29th<br />
when it is March 1st UTC. “Z” indicates<br />
whether the seconds should be set to zero (to<br />
allow calibration without having to transmit the<br />
full 6 bits of seconds data).<br />
Impulse Capture ID (02 H )<br />
This packet carries the program start time <strong>and</strong><br />
length, <strong>and</strong> can be used to tell a VCR to record<br />
this program. The format is shown in Table<br />
8.45.<br />
Start <strong>and</strong> length minutes have a range of<br />
0–59. Start hours have a range of 0–23; length<br />
hours have a range of 0–63. Dates have a range<br />
of 1–31. Months have a range of 1–12. “T” indicates<br />
if a program is routinely tape delayed for<br />
the Mountain <strong>and</strong> Pacific time zones. The “D,”<br />
“L.” <strong>and</strong> “Z” bits are ignored by the decoder.<br />
Supplemental Data Location (03 H )<br />
This packet uses 2–32 characters to specify<br />
other lines where additional VBI data may be<br />
found. Table 8.46 shows the format.<br />
“F” indicates field one (“0”) orfieldtwo<br />
(“1”). N may have a value of 7–31, <strong>and</strong> indicates<br />
a specific line number.<br />
Local Time Zone (04 H )<br />
This packet uses two characters to specify the<br />
viewer time zone <strong>and</strong> whether the locality<br />
observes daylight savings time. The format is<br />
shown in Table 8.47.<br />
Hours have a range of 0–23. This is the<br />
nominal time zone offset, in hours, relative to<br />
UTC. “D” is a “1” when the area is using daylight<br />
savings time.<br />
Out-of-B<strong>and</strong> Channel Number (40 H )<br />
This packet uses two characters to specify a<br />
channel number to which all subsequent outof-b<strong>and</strong><br />
packets refer. This is the CATV channel<br />
number to which any following out-of-b<strong>and</strong><br />
packets belong to. The format is shown in<br />
Table 8.48.<br />
Closed Captioning for Europe<br />
Closed captioning may be also used with <strong>PAL</strong><br />
videotapes <strong>and</strong> laserdiscs in Europe, present<br />
during the blanked active line-time portion of<br />
lines 22 <strong>and</strong> 335.<br />
The data format, amplitudes, <strong>and</strong> rise <strong>and</strong><br />
fall times are the same as for closed captioning<br />
in the United States. The timing, as shown in<br />
Figure 8.58, is slightly different due to the <strong>PAL</strong><br />
horizontal timing. Older closed captioning<br />
decoders designed for use only with <strong>NTSC</strong> systems<br />
may not work due to these timing differences.
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Character<br />
1 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 m0 start,minute<br />
1 D h4 h3 h2 h1 h0 start, hour<br />
1 L d4 d3 d2 d1 d0 start, date<br />
1 Z T m3 m2 m1 m0 start,month<br />
1 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 m0 length,minute<br />
1 h5 h4 h3 h2 h1 h0 length,hour<br />
Table 8.45. EIA-608 Impulse Capture ID Format.<br />
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Character<br />
1 F N4 N3 N2 N1 N0 location<br />
Table 8.46. EIA-608 Supplemental Data Format.<br />
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Character<br />
1 D h4 h3 h2 h1 h0 hour<br />
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 null<br />
Table 8.47. EIA-608 Local Time Zone Format.<br />
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Character<br />
1 c5 c4 c3 c2 c1 c0 channel low<br />
1 c11 c10 c9 c8 c7 c6 channel high<br />
Table 8.48. EIA-608 Out-of-B<strong>and</strong> Channel Number Format.<br />
VBI Data 355
356 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Widescreen Signalling<br />
To facilitate the h<strong>and</strong>ling of various aspect<br />
ratios of program material received by TVs, a<br />
widescreen signalling (WSS) system has been<br />
developed. This st<strong>and</strong>ard allows a WSSenhanced<br />
16:9 TV to display programs in their<br />
correct aspect ratio.<br />
625-Line <strong>PAL</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> Systems<br />
625-line <strong>PAL</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> systems are based<br />
on ITU-R BT.1119 <strong>and</strong> ETSI EN 300294. For<br />
YPbPr <strong>and</strong> S-video interfaces, WSS is present<br />
on the Y signal. For analog RGB interfaces,<br />
WSS is present on all three signals.<br />
The Analog Copy Generation Management<br />
System (CGMS-A) is also supported by the<br />
WSS signal.<br />
BLANK LEVEL<br />
SYNC LEVEL<br />
50 ±2 IRE<br />
43 IRE<br />
10.5 ± 0.25 µS<br />
4.43 MHZ<br />
COLOR BURST<br />
(10 CYCLES)<br />
10.00 ± 0.25 µS<br />
13.0 µS<br />
7 CYCLES<br />
OF 0.500 MHZ<br />
(CLOCK RUN–IN)<br />
Data Timing<br />
The first part of line 23 is used to transmit the<br />
WSS information, as shown in Figure 8.59.<br />
The clock frequency is 5 MHz (±100 Hz).<br />
The signal waveform should be a sine-squared<br />
pulse, with a half-amplitude duration of 200 ±10<br />
ns. The signal amplitude is 500 mV ±5%.<br />
The NRZ data bits are processed by a biphase<br />
code modulator, such that one data<br />
period equals 6 elements at 5 MHz.<br />
Data Content<br />
The WSS consists of a run-in code, a start<br />
code, <strong>and</strong> 14 bits of data, as shown in Table<br />
8.49.<br />
TWO 7–BIT + PARITY<br />
ASCII CHARACTERS<br />
(DATA)<br />
27.5 µS 34.0 µS<br />
S<br />
T<br />
A<br />
R<br />
T<br />
D0–D6 P D0–D6<br />
A<br />
R<br />
I<br />
T<br />
Y<br />
Figure 8.58. (B, D, G, H, I) <strong>PAL</strong> Line 22 <strong>and</strong> Line 335 Closed Captioning Timing.<br />
P<br />
A<br />
R<br />
I<br />
T<br />
Y<br />
240–288 NS<br />
RISE / FALL<br />
TIMES<br />
(2T BAR<br />
SHAPING)
Run-In<br />
The run-in consists of 29 elements at 5 MHz of<br />
a specific sequence, shown in Table 8.49.<br />
Start Code<br />
The start code consists of 24 elements at 5<br />
MHz of a specific sequence, shown in Table<br />
8.49.<br />
Group A Data<br />
The group A data consists of 4 data bits that<br />
specify the aspect ratio. Each data bit generates<br />
6 elements at 5 MHz. Data bit b0 is the<br />
LSB.<br />
Table 8.50 lists the data bit assignments<br />
<strong>and</strong>usage.Thenumberofactivelineslistedin<br />
Table 8.50 are for the exact aspect ratio (a =<br />
1.33, 1.56, or 1.78).<br />
The aspect ratio label indicates a range of<br />
possible aspect ratios (a) <strong>and</strong> number of active<br />
lines:<br />
4:3 a ≤ 1.46 527–576<br />
14:9 1.46 < a ≤ 1.66 463–526<br />
16:9 1.66 < a ≤ 1.90 405–462<br />
>16:9 a > 1.90 < 405<br />
BLANK LEVEL<br />
SYNC LEVEL<br />
500 MV ±5%<br />
43 IRE<br />
COLOR<br />
BURST<br />
RUN<br />
IN<br />
29<br />
5 MHZ<br />
ELEMENTS<br />
START<br />
CODE<br />
24<br />
5 MHZ<br />
ELEMENTS<br />
11.00 ± 0.25 µS 27.4 µS<br />
DATA<br />
(B0 - B13)<br />
84<br />
5 MHZ<br />
ELEMENTS<br />
FIgure 8.59. <strong>PAL</strong> Line 23 WSS Timing.<br />
VBI Data 357<br />
To allow automatic selection of the display<br />
mode, a 16:9 receiver should support the following<br />
minimum requirements:<br />
Case 1: The 4:3 aspect ratio picture should<br />
be centered on the display, with black bars<br />
on the left <strong>and</strong> right sides.<br />
Case 2: The 14:9 aspect ratio picture<br />
should be centered on the display, with<br />
black bars on the left <strong>and</strong> right sides. Alternately,<br />
the picture may be displayed using<br />
the full display width by using a small (typically<br />
8%) horizontal geometrical error.<br />
Case 3: The 16:9 aspect ratio picture<br />
should be displayed using the full width of<br />
the display.<br />
Case 4: The >16:9 aspect ratio picture<br />
should be displayed as in Case 3 or use the<br />
full height of the display by zooming in.<br />
Group B Data<br />
The group B data consists of four data bits that<br />
specify enhanced services. Each data bit gen-<br />
190–210 NS<br />
RISE / FALL<br />
TIMES<br />
(2T BAR<br />
SHAPING)
358 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
run-in<br />
start code<br />
group A<br />
(aspect ratio)<br />
group B<br />
(enhanced services)<br />
group C<br />
(subtitles)<br />
group D<br />
(reserved)<br />
b3,b2,b1,b0<br />
Aspect Ratio<br />
Label<br />
29 elements<br />
at 5 MHz<br />
24 elements<br />
at 5 MHz<br />
24 elements<br />
at 5 MHz<br />
“0” = 000 111<br />
“1” = 111 000<br />
24 elements<br />
at 5 MHz<br />
“0” = 000 111<br />
“1” = 111 000<br />
18 elements<br />
at 5 MHz<br />
“0” = 000 111<br />
“1” = 111 000<br />
18 elements<br />
at 5 MHz<br />
“0” = 000 111<br />
“1” = 111 000<br />
1 1111 0001 1100 0111 0001 1100 0111<br />
(1F1C 71C7 H)<br />
0001 1110 0011 1100 0001 1111<br />
(1E 3C1F H)<br />
b0,b1,b2,b3<br />
b4,b5,b6,b7<br />
(b7 = “0” since reserved)<br />
b8, b9, b10<br />
b11, b12, b13<br />
Table 8.49. <strong>PAL</strong> WSS Information.<br />
Format<br />
Position On<br />
4:3 Display<br />
Active<br />
Lines<br />
Minimum<br />
Requirements<br />
1000 4:3 full format – 576 case 1<br />
0001 14:9 letterbox center 504 case 2<br />
0010 14:9 letterbox top 504 case 2<br />
1011 16:9 letterbox center 430 case 3<br />
0100 16:9 letterbox top 430 case 3<br />
1101 > 16:9 letterbox center – case 4<br />
1110 14:9 full format center 576 –<br />
0111 16:9<br />
full format<br />
(anamorphic)<br />
– 576 –<br />
Table 8.50. <strong>PAL</strong> WSS Group A (Aspect Ratio) Data Bit Assignments <strong>and</strong> Usage.
erates six elements at 5 MHz. Data bit b4 is the<br />
LSB. Bits b5 <strong>and</strong> b6 are used for <strong>PAL</strong>plus.<br />
b4: mode<br />
0 camera mode<br />
1 film mode<br />
b5: color encoding<br />
0 normal <strong>PAL</strong><br />
1 Motion Adaptive ColorPlus<br />
b6: helper signals<br />
0 not present<br />
1 present<br />
Group C Data<br />
The group C data consists of three data bits<br />
that specify subtitles. Each data bit generates<br />
six elements at 5 MHz. Data bit b8 is the LSB.<br />
b8: teletext subtitles<br />
0 no<br />
1 yes<br />
b10, b9: open subtitles<br />
00 no<br />
01 inside active picture<br />
10 outsideactivepicture<br />
11 reserved<br />
Group D Data<br />
The group D data consists of three data bits<br />
that specify surround sound <strong>and</strong> copy protection.<br />
Each data bit generates six elements at 5<br />
MHz. Data bit b11 is the LSB.<br />
b11: surround sound<br />
0 no<br />
1 yes<br />
b12: copyright<br />
0 no copyright asserted or unknown<br />
1 copyright asserted<br />
b13: copy protection<br />
0 copying not restricted<br />
1 copying restricted<br />
VBI Data 359<br />
525-Line <strong>NTSC</strong> Systems<br />
EIA-J CPR-1204 <strong>and</strong> IEC 61880 define a widescreen<br />
signalling st<strong>and</strong>ard for <strong>NTSC</strong> systems.<br />
For YPbPr <strong>and</strong> S-video interfaces, WSS is<br />
present on the Y signal. For analog RGB interfaces,<br />
WSS is present on all three signals.<br />
Data Timing<br />
Lines20<strong>and</strong>283areusedtotransmittheWSS<br />
information, as shown in Figure 8.60.<br />
The clock frequency is F SC /8 or about<br />
447.443 kHz; F SC is the color subcarrier frequency<br />
of 3.579545 MHz. The signal waveform<br />
should be a sine-squared pulse, with a halfamplitude<br />
duration of 2.235 µs ±50 ns. The signal<br />
amplitude is 70 ±10 IRE for a “1”, <strong>and</strong>0±5<br />
IRE for a “0”.<br />
Data Content<br />
The WSS consists of 2 bits of start code, 14 bits<br />
ofdata,<strong>and</strong>6bitsofCRC,asshowninTable<br />
8.51. The CRC used is X 6 +X+1,allpresetto<br />
“1”.<br />
Start Code<br />
The start code consists of a “1” data bit followed<br />
by a “0” data bit, as shown in Table 8.51.<br />
Word 0 Data<br />
Word 0 data consists of 2 data bits:<br />
b1, b0:<br />
00 4:3 aspect ratio normal<br />
01 16:9 aspect ratio anamorphic<br />
10 4:3 aspect ratio letterbox<br />
11 reserved
360 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
BLANK LEVEL<br />
SYNC LEVEL<br />
70 ±10 IRE<br />
40 IRE<br />
COLOR<br />
BURST<br />
START<br />
CODE<br />
"1"<br />
START<br />
CODE<br />
"0"<br />
DATA<br />
(B0 - B19)<br />
11.20 ± 0.30 µS 49.1 ± 0.44 µS<br />
FIgure 8.60. <strong>NTSC</strong> Line 20 <strong>and</strong> Line 283 WSS Timing.<br />
start code “1”<br />
start code “0”<br />
word 0 b0, b1<br />
word 1 b2, b3, b4, b5<br />
word 2 b6, b7, b8, b9, b10, b11, b12, b13<br />
CRC b14, b15, b16, b17, b18, b19<br />
Table 8.51. <strong>NTSC</strong> WSS Data Bit Assignments <strong>and</strong> Usage.<br />
2235 ±50 NS<br />
RISE / FALL<br />
TIMES<br />
(2T BAR<br />
SHAPING)
Word 1 Data<br />
Word 1 data consists of 4 data bits:<br />
b5, b4, b3, b2:<br />
0000 copy control information<br />
1111 default<br />
Copy control information is transmitted in<br />
Word2datawhenWord1datais“0000”. When<br />
copy control information is not to be transferred,<br />
Word 1 data must be set to the default<br />
value “1111”.<br />
Word 2 Data<br />
Word 2 data consists of 14 data bits. When<br />
Word 1 data is “0000”, Word 2 data consists of<br />
copy control information. Word 2 copy control<br />
data must be transferred at the rate of two or<br />
more frames per two seconds.<br />
Bits b6 <strong>and</strong> b7 specify the copy generation<br />
management system in an analog signal<br />
(CGMS-A). CGMS-A consists of two bits of digital<br />
information:<br />
b7, b6:<br />
00 copying permitted<br />
01 one copy permitted<br />
10 reserved<br />
11 no copying permitted<br />
Bits b8 <strong>and</strong> b9 specify the operation of the<br />
the Macrovision copy protection signals added<br />
to the analog <strong>NTSC</strong> video signal:<br />
b9, b8:<br />
00 PSP off<br />
01 PSP on, 2-line split burst on<br />
10 PSP on, split burst off<br />
11 PSP on, 4-line split burst on<br />
PSP is the Macrovision pseudo-sync pulse<br />
operation.<br />
VBI Data 361<br />
Split burst operation inverts the normal<br />
phase of the first half of the color burst signal<br />
on specified scan lines in a normal analog<br />
video signal. The color burst of four successive<br />
lines of every 21 lines is modified, beginning at<br />
lines 24 <strong>and</strong> 297 (four-line split burst system)<br />
or of two successive lines of every 17 lines,<br />
beginning at lines 30 <strong>and</strong> 301 (two-line split<br />
burst system). The color burst on all other<br />
linesisnotmodified.<br />
Bit b10 specifies whether the source originatedfromananalogpre-recordedmedium.<br />
b10:<br />
0 not analog pre-recorded medium<br />
1 analog pre-recorded medium<br />
Bits b11, b12, <strong>and</strong> b13 are reserved <strong>and</strong> are<br />
“000”.<br />
Teletext<br />
Teletext allows the transmission of text, graphics,<br />
<strong>and</strong> data. Data may be transmitted on any<br />
line, although the VBI interval is most commonly<br />
used. The teletext st<strong>and</strong>ards are specified<br />
by ETSI ETS 300706, ITU-R BT.653 <strong>and</strong><br />
EIA–516.<br />
For YPbPr <strong>and</strong> S-video interfaces, teletext<br />
is present on the Y signal. For analog RGB<br />
interfaces, teletext is present on all three signals.<br />
There are many systems that use the teletext<br />
physical layer to transmit proprietary<br />
information. The advantage is that teletext has<br />
already been approved in many countries for<br />
broadcast, so certification for a new transmission<br />
technique is not required.<br />
The data rate for teletext is much higher<br />
than that used for closed captioning, approachingupto7Mbpsinsomecases.Therefore,<br />
ghost cancellation is needed to reliably recover<br />
the transmitted data.
362 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
There are seven teletext systems, as<br />
shown in Table 8.52. EIA–516, also referred to<br />
as NABTS (North American Broadcast Teletext<br />
Specification), is used in the United States,<br />
<strong>and</strong> is an expansion of the BT.653 525-line system<br />
C st<strong>and</strong>ard.<br />
System A:<br />
Columbia India<br />
France<br />
System B:<br />
Australia Netherl<strong>and</strong>s<br />
Belgium New Zeal<strong>and</strong><br />
China Norway<br />
Denmark Pol<strong>and</strong><br />
Egypt Singapore<br />
Finl<strong>and</strong> South Africa<br />
Germany Spain<br />
Italy Sweden<br />
Jordan Turkey<br />
Kuwait United Kingdom<br />
Malaysia Yugoslavia<br />
Morocco<br />
System C:<br />
Brazil United States<br />
Canada<br />
System D:<br />
Japan<br />
Figure 8.61 illustrates the teletext data on a<br />
scan line. If a line normally contains a color<br />
burst signal, it will still be present if teletext<br />
data is present. The 16 bits of clock run-in (or<br />
clock sync) consists of alternating “1’s” <strong>and</strong><br />
“0’s”.<br />
Figures 8.62 <strong>and</strong> 8.63 illustrates the structure<br />
of teletext systems B <strong>and</strong> C, respectively.<br />
System B Teletext Over view<br />
Since teletext System B is the most popular<br />
teletext format, a basic overview is presented<br />
here.<br />
A teletext service typically consists of<br />
pages, with each page corresponding to a<br />
screen of information. The pages are transmitted<br />
one at time, <strong>and</strong> after all pages have been<br />
Parameter System A System B System C System D<br />
bit rate (Mbps) 6.203125<br />
625-Line Video Systems<br />
6.9375 5.734375 5.6427875<br />
data amplitude 67 IRE 66 IRE 70 IRE 70 IRE<br />
data per line 40 bytes 45 bytes 36 bytes 37 bytes<br />
525-Line Video Systems<br />
bit rate (Mbps) – 5.727272 5.727272 5.727272<br />
data amplitude – 70 IRE 70 IRE 70 IRE<br />
data per line – 37 bytes 36 bytes 37 bytes<br />
Table 8.52. Summary of Teletext Systems <strong>and</strong> Parameters.
transmitted, the cycle repeats, with a typical<br />
cycle time of about 30 seconds. However, the<br />
broadcaster may transmit some pages more<br />
frequently than others, if desired.<br />
The teletext service is usually based on up<br />
to eight magazines (allowing up to eight independent<br />
teletext services), with each magazine<br />
containing up to 100 pages. Magazine 1 uses<br />
page numbers 100–199, magazine 2 uses page<br />
numbers 200–299, etc. Each page may also<br />
have sub-pages, used to extend the number of<br />
pages within a magazine.<br />
Each page contains 24 rows, with up to 40<br />
characters per row. A character may be a letter,<br />
number, symbol, or simple graphic. There are<br />
also control codes to select colors <strong>and</strong> other<br />
attributes such as blinking <strong>and</strong> double height.<br />
In addition to teletext information, the teletext<br />
protocol may be used to transmit other<br />
information, such as subtitling, program delivery<br />
control (PDC), <strong>and</strong> private data.<br />
BLANK LEVEL<br />
SYNC LEVEL<br />
COLOR<br />
BURST<br />
CLOCK<br />
RUN-IN<br />
FIgure 8.61. Teletext Line Format.<br />
DATA AND ADDRESS<br />
VBI Data 363<br />
Subtitling<br />
Subtitling is similar to the closed captioning<br />
used in the United States. “Open” subtitles are<br />
the insertion of text directly into the picture<br />
prior to transmission. “Closed” subtitles are<br />
transmitted separately from the picture. The<br />
transmission of closed subtitles in the UK use<br />
teletext page 888. In the case where multiple<br />
languages are transmitted using teletext, separate<br />
pages are used for each language.<br />
Program Delivery Control (PDC)<br />
Program Delivery Control (defined by ETSI<br />
ETS 300231 <strong>and</strong> ITU-R BT.809) is a system that<br />
controls VCR recording using teletext information.<br />
The VCR can be programmed to look for<br />
<strong>and</strong>recordvarioustypesofprogramsoraspecific<br />
program. Programs are recorded even if<br />
the transmission time changes for any reason.<br />
There are two methods of transmitting<br />
PDC information via teletext: methods A <strong>and</strong><br />
B.
364 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
PAGE ADDRESS<br />
(1 BYTE)<br />
MAGAZINE / PACKET ADDRESS<br />
(2 BYTES)<br />
BYTE SYNC<br />
(1 BYTE)<br />
CLOCK SYNC<br />
(2 BYTES)<br />
TELETEXT<br />
PACKET 27<br />
HEADER PACKET<br />
NEXT HEADER PACKET<br />
DATA BLOCK<br />
DATA PACKET<br />
NEXT HEADER PACKET<br />
LAST PACKET OF PAGE<br />
PACKET 26<br />
PACKET 28<br />
PAGE<br />
PACKET 27 DATA<br />
HEADER PACKET<br />
GROUP<br />
APPLICATION LAYER<br />
PRESENTATION LAYER<br />
SESSION LAYER<br />
TRANSPORT LAYER<br />
NETWORK LAYER<br />
LINK LAYER<br />
DATA UNIT PHYSICAL LAYER<br />
FIgure 8.62. Teletext System B Structure.
RECORD HEADER<br />
DATA GROUP HEADER<br />
(8 BYTES)<br />
P HEADER<br />
(5 BYTES)<br />
BYTE SYNC<br />
(1 BYTE)<br />
CLOCK SYNC<br />
(2 BYTES)<br />
TELETEXT<br />
ITU-T T.101, ANNEX D<br />
RECORD 1<br />
DATA GROUP 1<br />
DATA BLOCK<br />
DATA PACKET<br />
RECORD N<br />
DATA GROUP N<br />
S (1 BYTE)<br />
APPLICATION LAYER<br />
PRESENTATION LAYER<br />
SESSION LAYER<br />
TRANSPORT LAYER<br />
NETWORK LAYER<br />
LINK LAYER<br />
DATA UNIT PHYSICAL LAYER<br />
FIgure 8.63. Teletext System C Structure.<br />
VBI Data 365
366 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
Method A places the data on a viewable<br />
teletext page, <strong>and</strong> is usually transmitted on<br />
scan line 16. This method is also known as the<br />
Video Programming System (VPS).<br />
Method B places the data on a hidden<br />
packet (packet 26) in the teletext signal. This<br />
packet 26 data contains the data on each program,<br />
including channel, program data, <strong>and</strong><br />
start time.<br />
Data Broadcasting<br />
Data broadcasting may be used to transmit<br />
information to private receivers. Typical applications<br />
include real-time financial information,<br />
airport flight schedules for hotels <strong>and</strong> travel<br />
agents, passenger information for railroads,<br />
software upgrades, etc.<br />
Packets 0–23<br />
A typical teletext page uses 24 packets, numbered<br />
0–23, that correspond to the 24 rows on<br />
a displayed page. Packet 24 can add a status<br />
rowatthebottomforuserprompting.Foreach<br />
packet, three bits specify the magazine<br />
address (1–8), <strong>and</strong> five bits specify the row<br />
address (0–23). The magazine <strong>and</strong> row<br />
address bits are Hamming error protected to<br />
permit single-bit errors to be corrected.<br />
To save b<strong>and</strong>width, the whole address isn’t<br />
sent with all packets. Only packet 0 (also called<br />
the header packet) has all the address information<br />
such as row, page, <strong>and</strong> magazine address<br />
data. Packets 1–28 contain information that is<br />
part of the page identified by the most recent<br />
packet 0 of the same magazine.<br />
The transmission of a page starts with a<br />
header packet. Subsequent packets with the<br />
same magazine address provide additional<br />
data for that page. These packets may be transmitted<br />
in any order, <strong>and</strong> interleaved with packets<br />
from other magazines. A page is<br />
considered complete when the next header<br />
packet for that magazine is received.<br />
The general format for packet 0 is:<br />
clock run-in 2 bytes<br />
framing code 1 byte<br />
magazine <strong>and</strong> row address 2 bytes<br />
page number 2 bytes<br />
subcode 4 bytes<br />
control codes 2 bytes<br />
display data 32 bytes<br />
The general format for packets 1–23 is:<br />
clock run-in 2 bytes<br />
framing code 1 byte<br />
magazine <strong>and</strong> row address 2 bytes<br />
display data 40 bytes<br />
Packet 24<br />
This packet defines an additional row for user<br />
prompting. Teletext decoders may use the data<br />
in packet 27 to react to prompts in the packet<br />
24 display row.<br />
Packet 25<br />
This packet defines a replacement header line.<br />
If present, the 40 bytes of data are displayed<br />
instead of the channel, page, time, <strong>and</strong> date<br />
from packet 8.30.<br />
Packet 26<br />
Packet 26 consists of:<br />
clock run-in 2 bytes<br />
framing code 1 byte<br />
magazine <strong>and</strong> row address 2 bytes<br />
designation code 1 byte<br />
13 3-byte data groups, each consisting of<br />
7databits<br />
6addressbits<br />
5modebits<br />
6 Hamming bits
There are 15 variations of packet 26,<br />
defined by the designation code. Each of the 13<br />
data groups specify a specific display location<br />
<strong>and</strong> data relating to that location.<br />
This packet is also used to extend the<br />
addressable range of the basic character set in<br />
order to support other languages, such as Arabic,<br />
Spanish, Hungarian, Chinese, etc.<br />
For PDC, packet 26 contains data for each<br />
program, identifying the channel, program<br />
date, start time, <strong>and</strong> the cursor position of the<br />
program information on the page. When the<br />
user selects a program, the cursor position is<br />
linked to the appropriate packet 26 preselection<br />
data. This data is then used to program the<br />
VCR. When the program is transmitted, the<br />
program information is transmitted using<br />
packet 8.30 format 2. A match between the preselection<br />
data <strong>and</strong> the packet 8.30 data turns<br />
the VCR record mode on.<br />
Packet 27<br />
Packet 27 tells the teletext decoder how to<br />
respond to user selections for packet 24. There<br />
may be up to four packet 27s (packets 27/0<br />
through 27/3), allowing up to 24 links. It consists<br />
of:<br />
clock run-in 2 bytes<br />
framing code 1 byte<br />
magazine <strong>and</strong> row address 2 bytes<br />
designation code 1 byte<br />
link 1 (red) 6 bytes<br />
link 2 (green) 6 bytes<br />
link 3 (yellow) 6 bytes<br />
link 4 (cyan) 6 bytes<br />
link 5 (next page) 6 bytes<br />
link 6 (index) 6 bytes<br />
link control data 1 byte<br />
page check digit 2 bytes<br />
Each link consists of:<br />
7databits<br />
6addressbits<br />
5modebits<br />
6hammingbits<br />
VBI Data 367<br />
This packet contains information linking<br />
the current page to six page numbers (links).<br />
The four colored links correspond to the four<br />
colored Fastext page request keys on the<br />
remote. Typically, these four keys correspond<br />
to four colored menu selections at the bottom<br />
of the display using packet 24. Selection of one<br />
of the colored page request keys results in the<br />
selection of the corresponding linked page.<br />
The fifth link is used for specifying a page<br />
theusermightwanttoseeafterthecurrent<br />
page, such as the next page in a sequence.<br />
The sixth link corresponds to the Fastext<br />
index key on the remote, <strong>and</strong> specifies the<br />
page address to go to when the index is<br />
selected.<br />
Packets 28 <strong>and</strong> 29<br />
These are used to define level 2 <strong>and</strong> level 3<br />
pages to support higher resolution graphics,<br />
additional colors, alternate character sets, etc.<br />
They are similar in structure to packet 26.<br />
Packet 8.30 Format 1<br />
Packet 8.30 (magazine 8, packet 30) isn’t associated<br />
with any page, but is sent once per second.<br />
This packet is also known as the<br />
Television Service Data Packet, or TSDP. It<br />
contains data that notifies the teletext decoder<br />
about the transmission in general <strong>and</strong> the time.<br />
clock run-in 2 bytes<br />
framing code 1 byte<br />
magazine <strong>and</strong> row address 2 bytes<br />
designation code 1 byte<br />
initial teletext page 6 bytes<br />
network ID 2 bytes
368 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
time offset from UTC 1 byte<br />
date (Modified Julian Day) 3 bytes<br />
UTC time 3 bytes<br />
TV program label 4 bytes<br />
status display 20 bytes<br />
The Designation Code indicates whether<br />
the transmission is during the VBI or full-field.<br />
Initial Teletext Page tells the decoder<br />
which page should be captured <strong>and</strong> stored on<br />
power-up. This is usually an index or menu<br />
page.<br />
The Network Identification code identifies<br />
the transmitting network.<br />
The TV Program Label indicates the program<br />
label for the current program.<br />
Status Display is used to display a transmission<br />
status message.<br />
Packet 8.30 Format 2<br />
This format is used for PDC recorder control,<br />
<strong>and</strong> is transmitted once per second per stream.<br />
It contains a program label indicating the start<br />
of each program, usually transmitted about 30<br />
seconds before the start of the program to<br />
allow the VCR to detect it <strong>and</strong> get ready to<br />
record.<br />
clock run-in 2 bytes<br />
framing code 1 byte<br />
magazine <strong>and</strong> row address 2 bytes<br />
designation code 1 byte<br />
initial teletext page 6 bytes<br />
label channel ID 1 byte<br />
program control status 1 byte<br />
country <strong>and</strong> network ID 2 bytes<br />
program ID label 5 bytes<br />
country <strong>and</strong> network ID 2 bytes<br />
program type 2 bytes<br />
status display 20 bytes<br />
ThecontentisthesameasforFormat1,<br />
except for the 13 bytes of information before<br />
the status display information.<br />
Label channel ID (LCI) identifies each of<br />
up to four PDC streams that may be transmitted<br />
simultaneously.<br />
The Program Control Status (PCS) indicates<br />
real-time status information, such as the<br />
type of analog sound transmission.<br />
The Country <strong>and</strong> Network ID (CNI) is split<br />
into two groups. The first part specifies the<br />
country <strong>and</strong> the second part specifies the network.<br />
Program ID Label (PIL) specifies the<br />
month, day, <strong>and</strong> local time of the start of the<br />
program.<br />
Program Type (PTY) is a code that indicates<br />
an intended audience or a particular<br />
series. Examples are “adult”, “children”,<br />
“music”, “drama”, etc.<br />
Packet 31<br />
Packet 31 is used for the transmission of data<br />
to private receivers. It consists of:<br />
clock run-in 2 bytes<br />
framing code 1 byte<br />
data channel group 1 byte<br />
message bits 1 byte<br />
format type 1 byte<br />
address length 1 byte<br />
address 0–6 bytes<br />
repeat indicator 0–1byte<br />
continuity indicator 0–1byte<br />
data length 0–1byte<br />
user data 28–36 bytes<br />
CRC 2 bytes
ATVEF Interactive Content<br />
ATVEF (Advanced Television Enhancement<br />
Forum) is a st<strong>and</strong>ard for creating <strong>and</strong> delivering<br />
enhanced <strong>and</strong> interactive programs. The<br />
enhanced content can be delivered over a variety<br />
of mediums—including analog <strong>and</strong> digital<br />
television broadcasts—using terrestrial, cable,<br />
<strong>and</strong> satellite networks.<br />
In defining how to create enhanced content,<br />
the ATVEF specification defines the minimum<br />
functionality required by ATVEFcompliant<br />
receivers. To minimize the creation<br />
of new specifications, the ATVEF uses existing<br />
Internet technologies such as HTML <strong>and</strong> Javascript.<br />
Two additional benefits of doing this are<br />
that there are already millions of pages of<br />
potential content, <strong>and</strong> the ability to use existing<br />
web-authoring tools.<br />
The ATVEF 1.0 Content Specification m<strong>and</strong>ates<br />
that receivers support, as a minimum,<br />
HTML 4.0, Javascript 1.1, <strong>and</strong> Cascading Style<br />
Sheets. Supporting additional capabilities,<br />
such as Java <strong>and</strong> VRML, are optional. This<br />
ensures content is available to the maximum<br />
number of viewers.<br />
For increased capability, a new “tv:”<br />
attribute is added to the HTML. This attribute<br />
enables the insertion of the television program<br />
intothecontent,<strong>and</strong>maybeusedinaHTML<br />
document anywhere that a regular image may<br />
be placed. Creating an enhanced content page<br />
that displays the current television channel<br />
anywhere on the display is as easy as inserting<br />
an image in a HTML document.<br />
The specification also defines how the<br />
receiver obtains the content <strong>and</strong> how it is<br />
informed that enhancements are available. The<br />
latter task is accomplished with triggers.<br />
VBI Data 369<br />
Triggers<br />
Triggers alert receivers to content enhancements,<br />
<strong>and</strong> contain information about the<br />
enhancements. Among other things, triggers<br />
contain a Universal Resource Locator (URL)<br />
that defines the location of the enhanced content.<br />
Content may reside locally—such as<br />
when delivered over the network <strong>and</strong> cached<br />
to a local hard drive—oritmayresideonthe<br />
Internet or another network.<br />
Triggers may also contain a human-readable<br />
description of the content. For example, it<br />
maycontainthedescription“Press ORDER to<br />
order this product”, which can be displayed for<br />
the viewer. Triggers also may contain expiration<br />
information, indicating how long the<br />
enhancement should be offered to the viewer.<br />
Lastly, triggers may contain scripts that<br />
trigger the execution of Javascript within the<br />
associated HTML page, to support synchronization<br />
of the enhanced content with the video<br />
signal <strong>and</strong> updating of dynamic screen data.<br />
Transports<br />
Besides defining how content is displayed, <strong>and</strong><br />
how the receiver is notified of new content, the<br />
specification also defines how content is delivered.<br />
Because a receiver may not have an<br />
Internet connection, the specification<br />
describes two models for delivering content.<br />
These two models are called transports, <strong>and</strong><br />
the two transports are referred to as Transport<br />
Type A <strong>and</strong> Transport Type B.<br />
If the receiver has a back-channel (or<br />
return path) to the Internet, Transport Type A<br />
will broadcast the trigger <strong>and</strong> the content will<br />
be pulled over the Internet.
370 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
If the receiver does not have an Internet<br />
connection, Transport Type B provides for<br />
delivery of both triggers <strong>and</strong> content via the<br />
broadcast medium. Announcements are sent<br />
over the network to associate triggers with<br />
content streams. An announcement describes<br />
the content, <strong>and</strong> may include information<br />
regarding b<strong>and</strong>width, storage requirements,<br />
<strong>and</strong> language.<br />
Deliver y Protocols<br />
For traditional bi-directional Internet communication,<br />
the Hypertext Transfer Protocol<br />
(HTTP) defines how data is transferred at the<br />
application level. For uni-directional broadcasts<br />
where a two-way connection is not available,<br />
ATVEF also defines a uni-directional<br />
application-level protocol for data delivery:<br />
Uni-directional Hypertext Transfer Protocol<br />
(UHTTP).<br />
Like HTTP, UHTTP uses traditional URL<br />
naming schemes to reference content. Content<br />
can reference enhancement pages using the<br />
st<strong>and</strong>ard “http:” <strong>and</strong> “ftp:” naming schemes.<br />
However, ATVEF also adds the “lid:,” or local<br />
identifier URL, naming scheme. This allows<br />
reference to content that exists locally (such as<br />
on the receiver's hard drive) as opposed to on<br />
the Internet or other network.<br />
Bindings<br />
How data is delivered over a specific network<br />
is called binding. The ATVEF has defined bindings<br />
for IP multicast <strong>and</strong> <strong>NTSC</strong>. The binding to<br />
IP is referred to as “reference binding”.<br />
ATVEF Over <strong>NTSC</strong><br />
Transport Type A triggers are broadcast on<br />
data channel 2 of the EIA-608 captioning signal.<br />
Transport Type B binding also includes a<br />
mechanism for delivering IP over the vertical<br />
blanking interval (VBI), otherwise knows as<br />
IP over VBI (IP/VBI). At the lowest level, the<br />
television signal transports NABTS (North<br />
American Basic Teletext St<strong>and</strong>ard) packets<br />
during the VBI. These NABTS packets are<br />
recovered to form a sequential data stream<br />
(encapsulated in a SLIP-like protocol) that is<br />
unframed to produce IP packets.<br />
“Raw” VBI Data<br />
“Raw”, or oversampled, VBI data is simply digitized<br />
VBI data. It is typically oversampled<br />
using a 2× video sample clock, such as 27<br />
MHz. Two applications for “raw” VBI data are<br />
PCs (for software decoding of VBI data) <strong>and</strong><br />
settop boxes (to pass the VBI data on to the<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong>/<strong>PAL</strong> encoder).<br />
VBI data may be present on any scan line,<br />
except during the serration <strong>and</strong> equalization<br />
intervals.<br />
One requirement for oversampled VBI<br />
data is that the “active line time” be a constant,<br />
independent of the horizontal timing of the<br />
BLANK* control signal. Thus, all the VBI data<br />
is assured to be captured regardless of the output<br />
resolution of the active video data.<br />
A separate control signal, called<br />
VBIVALID*, may be used to indicate when VBI<br />
data is present on the digital video interface.<br />
This simplifies the design of graphics chips,<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong>/<strong>PAL</strong> encoders, <strong>and</strong> ASICs that are<br />
required to separate the VBI data from the digital<br />
video data.
“Sliced” VBI Data<br />
“Sliced”, orbinary,VBIdataisusefulinMPEG<br />
video systems, such as settop boxes, DVD, digital<br />
VCRs, <strong>and</strong> TVs. It may also be used in PC<br />
applications to reduce PCI b<strong>and</strong>width.<br />
VBI data may be present on any scan line,<br />
except during the serration <strong>and</strong> equalization<br />
intervals.<br />
A separate control signal, called<br />
VBIVALID*, may be used to indicate when VBI<br />
data is present on the digital video interface.<br />
This simplifies the design of graphics chips,<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong>/<strong>PAL</strong> encoders, <strong>and</strong> ASICs that are<br />
required to separate the VBI data from the digital<br />
video data.<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong>/<strong>PAL</strong> Decoder Considerations<br />
For sliced VBI data capture, hysteresis must<br />
be used to prevent VBI decoders from rapidly<br />
turning on <strong>and</strong> off due to noise <strong>and</strong> transmission<br />
errors. In addition, the VBI decoders<br />
must also compensate for DC offsets, amplitude<br />
variations, ghosting, <strong>and</strong> timing variations.<br />
For closed captioning, the caption VBI<br />
decoder monitors the appropriate scan lines<br />
looking for the clock run-in <strong>and</strong> start bits used<br />
by captioning. If found, it locks on to the clock<br />
run-in, the caption data is sampled, converted<br />
to binary data, <strong>and</strong> the 16 bits of data are transferred<br />
to registers to be output via the host<br />
processor or video interface. If the clock run-in<br />
<strong>and</strong> start bits are not found, it is assumed the<br />
scan line contains video data, unless other VBI<br />
data is detected.<br />
For WSS, the WSS VBI decoder monitors<br />
the appropriate scan lines looking for the runin<br />
<strong>and</strong> start codes used by WSS. If found, it<br />
locks on to the run-in code, the WSS data is<br />
sampled, converted to binary data, <strong>and</strong> the 14<br />
or 20 bits of data are transferred to registers to<br />
VBI Data 371<br />
be output via the host processor or video interface.<br />
If the clock run-in <strong>and</strong> start codes are not<br />
found, it is assumed the scan line contains<br />
video data, unless other VBI data is detected.<br />
For teletext, the teletext VBI decoder monitors<br />
each scan line looking for the 16-bit clock<br />
run-in code used by teletext. If found, it locks<br />
on to the clock run-in code, the teletext data is<br />
sampled, converted to binary data, <strong>and</strong> the<br />
data is then transferred to registers to be output<br />
via the teletext or video interface. Conventional<br />
host serial interfaces, such as I 2 C,<br />
cannot h<strong>and</strong>le the high bit rates of teletext.<br />
Thus, a 2-pin serial teletext interface is commonly<br />
used. If the 16-bit clock run-in code is<br />
not found, it is assumed the scan line contains<br />
video data, unless other VBI data is detected.<br />
Ghost Cancellation<br />
Ghost cancellation is required due to the high<br />
data rate of some services, such as teletext.<br />
Ghosting greater than 100 ns <strong>and</strong> –12 dB corrupts<br />
teletext data. Ghosting greater than –3<br />
dB is difficult to remove cost-effectively in<br />
hardware or software, while ghosting less than<br />
–12 dB need not be removed. Ghost cancellation<br />
for VBI data is not as complex as ghost<br />
cancellation for active video.<br />
Unfortunately, the GCR (ghost cancellation<br />
reference) signal is not commonly used in<br />
many countries. Thus, a ghost cancellation<br />
algorithm must determine the amount of<br />
ghosting using other available signals, such as<br />
the serration <strong>and</strong> equalization pulses.<br />
<strong>NTSC</strong> Ghost Cancellation<br />
The <strong>NTSC</strong> GCR signal is specified in ATSC A/<br />
49 <strong>and</strong> ITU-R BT.1124. If present, it occupies<br />
lines 19 <strong>and</strong> 282. The GCR permits the detection<br />
of ghosting from –3 to +45 µs, <strong>and</strong> follows<br />
an 8-field sequence.
372 <strong>Chapter</strong> 8: <strong>NTSC</strong>, <strong>PAL</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>SECAM</strong> <strong>Overview</strong><br />
<strong>PAL</strong> Ghost Cancellation<br />
The <strong>PAL</strong> GCR signal is also specified in<br />
BT.1124 <strong>and</strong> ETSI ETS 300732. If present, it<br />
occupies line 318. The GCR permits the detection<br />
of ghosting from –3 to +45 µs, <strong>and</strong> follows<br />
a4-framesequence.<br />
References<br />
1. Advanced Television Enhancement<br />
Forum, Enhanced Content Specification,<br />
1999.<br />
2. ANSI/SMPTE 12M–1999, Television,<br />
Audio <strong>and</strong> Film—Time <strong>and</strong> Control Code.<br />
3. ANSI/SMPTE 170M–1999, Television—<br />
Composite Analog Video Signal—<strong>NTSC</strong> for<br />
Studio Applications.<br />
4. ANSI/SMPTE 262M–1995, Television,<br />
Audio <strong>and</strong> Film—Binary Groups of Time<br />
<strong>and</strong> Control Codes—Storage <strong>and</strong> Transmission<br />
of Data.<br />
5. ANSI/SMPTE 309M–1999, Television—<br />
Transmission of Date <strong>and</strong> Time Zone Information<br />
in Binary Groups of Time <strong>and</strong> Control<br />
Code.<br />
6. ATSC A/49, 13 May 1993, Ghost Cancelling<br />
Reference Signal for <strong>NTSC</strong>.<br />
7. BBC Technical Requirements for Digital<br />
Television Services, Version 1.0, February<br />
3, 1999, BBC Broadcast.<br />
8. EIA-189-A, July 1976, Encoded Color Bar<br />
Signal.<br />
9. EIA–516, May 1988, North American Basic<br />
Teletext Specification (NABTS).<br />
10. EIA–608, September 1994, Recommended<br />
Practice for Line 21 Data Service.<br />
11. EIA–744–A, December 1998, Transport of<br />
Content Advisory Information Using<br />
Extended Data Service (XDS).<br />
12. EIA/IS–702, July 1997, Copy Generation<br />
Management System (Analog).<br />
13. EIA-J CPR–1204–1, 1998, Specifications<br />
<strong>and</strong>TransferMethodofVideoAspectRatio<br />
Identification Signal (II).<br />
14. ETSI EN 300163, Television Systems:<br />
NICAM 728: Transmission of Two Channel<br />
Digital Sound with Terrestrial Television<br />
SystemsB,G,H,I,K1,<strong>and</strong>L, March 1998.<br />
15. ETSI EN 300294, Television Systems: 625line<br />
Television Widescreen Signalling<br />
(WSS), April 1998.<br />
16. ETSI ETS 300231, Television Systems: Specification<br />
of the Domestic Video Programme<br />
Delivery Control System (PDC), April 1998.<br />
17. ETSI ETS 300706, Enhanced Teletext Specification,<br />
May 1997.<br />
18. ETSI ETS 300708, Television Systems: Data<br />
Transmission within Teletext, March 1997.<br />
19. ETSI ETS 300731, Television Systems:<br />
Enhanced 625-Line Phased Alternate Line<br />
(<strong>PAL</strong>) Television: <strong>PAL</strong>plus, March 1997.<br />
20. ETSI ETS 300732, Television Systems:<br />
Enhanced 625-Line <strong>PAL</strong>/<strong>SECAM</strong> Television;<br />
Ghost Cancellation Reference (GCR)<br />
Signals, January 1997.<br />
21. Faroudja, Yves Charles, <strong>NTSC</strong> <strong>and</strong> Beyond,<br />
IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics,<br />
Vol. 34, No. 1, February 1988.<br />
22. IEC 61880, 1998–1, Video Systems (525/<br />
60)—Video <strong>and</strong> Accompanied Data Using<br />
the Vertical Blanking Interval—Analog<br />
Interface.<br />
23. ITU-R BS.707–3, 1998, Transmission of<br />
Multisound in Terrestrial Television Systems<strong>PAL</strong>B,G,H,<strong>and</strong>I<strong>and</strong><strong>SECAM</strong>D,K,<br />
K1, <strong>and</strong> L.<br />
24. ITU-R BT.470–6, 1998, Conventional Television<br />
Systems.
25. ITU-R BT.471–1, 1986, Nomenclature <strong>and</strong><br />
Description of Colour Bar Signals.<br />
26. ITU-R BT.472–3, 1990, Video Frequency<br />
Characteristics of a Television System to Be<br />
Used for the International Exchange of Programmes<br />
Between Countries that Have<br />
Adopted 625-Line Colour or Monochrome<br />
Systems.<br />
27. ITU-R BT.473–5, 1990, Insertion of Test Signals<br />
in the Field-Blanking Interval of Monochrome<br />
<strong>and</strong> Colour Television Signals.<br />
28. ITU-R BT.569–2, 1986, Definition of Parameters<br />
for Simplified Automatic Measurement<br />
of Television Insertion Test Signals.<br />
29. ITU-R BT.653–3, 1998, Teletext Systems.<br />
30. ITU-R BT.809, 1992, Programme Delivery<br />
Control (PDC) System for Video Recording.<br />
31. ITU-R BT.1118, 1994, Enhanced Compatible<br />
Widescreen Television Based on Conventional<br />
Television Systems.<br />
32. ITU-R BT.1119–2, 1998, Wide-Screen Signalling<br />
for Broadcasting.<br />
33. ITU-R BT.1124, 1994, Reference Signals for<br />
Ghost Cancelling in Analogue Television<br />
Systems.<br />
34. ITU-R BT.1197–1, 1998, Enhanced Wide-<br />
Screen <strong>PAL</strong> TV Transmission System (the<br />
<strong>PAL</strong>plus System).<br />
References 373<br />
35. ITU-R BT.1298, 1997, Enhanced Wide-<br />
Screen <strong>NTSC</strong> TV Transmission System.<br />
36. Multichannel Television Sound, BTSCSystem<br />
Recommended Practices, EIA Television<br />
Systems Bulletin No. 5, July 1985,<br />
Electronic Industries Association.<br />
37. <strong>NTSC</strong> Video Measurements, Tektronix,<br />
Inc., 1997.<br />
38. SMPTE RP164–1996, Location of Vertical<br />
Interval Time Code.<br />
39. SMPTE RP186–1995, Video Index Information<br />
Coding for 525- <strong>and</strong> 625-Line Television<br />
Systems.<br />
40. SMPTE RP201–1999, Encoding Film<br />
Transfer Information Using Vertical Interval<br />
Time Code.<br />
41. Specification of Television St<strong>and</strong>ards for<br />
625-Line System-I Transmissions, 1971,<br />
Independent Television Authority (ITA)<br />
<strong>and</strong> British Broadcasting Corporation<br />
(BBC).<br />
42. Television Measurements, <strong>NTSC</strong> Systems,<br />
Tektronix, Inc., 1998.<br />
43. Television Measurements, <strong>PAL</strong> Systems,<br />
Tektronix, Inc., 1990.